C H N T £ 
 
 AS 
 
// _ //,. • / 
 
 Dear Friend : 
 
 The Calypso Assembly for 1887 exceeds in popularity 
 . and financial success even the fondest hope of the committee in 
 charge ; and the Executive Committee of the Northampton County 
 Sunday School Association feel that the time has come when the As¬ 
 sembly should accomplish yet more and better things—better lor 
 ourselves in that we shall be able to pay a reasonable sum to the 
 persons addressing us, thereby attaining the dignity of self-support; 
 better for us that we shall be able to invite the foremost of the reli¬ 
 gious writers and speakers of the day, thus affording to many an 
 opportunity not to be secured in any other way. 
 
 To this end while the Northampton Co. S. S. Association retains 
 oversight of the Assembly, it is thought wise to entirely separate the 
 workings of the two (not however separating the workers.) The 
 Northampton Co. S. S. Association will endeavor to hold five conven¬ 
 tions each year in various parts of the County, and for that work 
 the appeal for each school in the County $o contribute at the rate of 
 a penny a member is continued. There is room for improvement in 
 these meetings, and the committee will endeavor to secure improve¬ 
 ments as you give them the opportunity. 
 
 But the Calypso Assembly has a wider influence, extending be¬ 
 yond the County in its audiences; it is ambitious for greater things, 
 for more comfortable surroundings. The history of the three years 
 that have passed gives assurance that a wise conservatism will 
 prevent undue haste in these improvements so that we can confi¬ 
 dently make this appeal. 
 
 In order that the next committee may be able to arrange a 
 proper programme they must begin to plan early in the winter and 
 begin the necessary correspondence with the opening of the year. 
 The Executive Committee are careful not to change the old policy of 
 spending money only when it is well in sight, so that there may be 
 no debts to pay. It is therefore absolutely necessary to know before¬ 
 hand an approximation to the amount of money that can be spent; 
 and while the Calypso Assembly of 1888 is apparently a long way off 
 subscriptions should be made now. 
 
 We have no doubt that most of the thousands that were present 
 at the last Assembly would be willing to contribute something to the 
 carrying on of the next, if they only had the opportunity. In order 
 to give them an opportunity we are desirous of having a collector in 
 each congregation for the purpose of soliciting subscriptions. Will 
 you kindly inform the Secretary of the Association, tho Rev. J. F. 
 Sheppard, South Easton, Pa., of some one whom you can recommend 
 for this purpose so we can send them the proper papers. 
 
 All money paid will be receipted for by the Treasurer of the 
 Association, and all contributors will receive by mail the announce¬ 
 ment of the meeting and a financial statement. 
 
 Yery Respectfully, 
 
 J. F. SHEPPARD, Sec’y. 
 
 CHARLES McINTIRE, Jr., Treas. 
 
 Committee. 
 


 
 GEOMJLLER MISHJ1 
 
 ®H8KWJUER MISHIT 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
I 
 
 
 
WORKS ON 
 
 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY, 
 
 AND ITS APPLICATIONS TO 
 
 ENGINEERING, MECHANICAL AND OTHER INDUSTRIAL DRAWING. 
 
 By S. EDWARD WARREN, C.E. 
 
 I. ELEMENTARY WORKS. 
 
 1. Primary Geometry. An introduction to geometry ao 
 usually presented; and designed, first , to facilitate an earlier 
 beginning of the subject, and, second, to lead to its graphical 
 applications in manual and other elementary schools. With 
 numerous practical examples and cuts. Large 12mo, cloth, 80c. 
 
 2. Free-hand Geometrical Drawing, widely and variously 
 useful in training the eye and hand in accurate sketching of plane 
 and solid figures, lettering, etc. 12 folding plates, many cuts. 
 Large 12mo, cloth, SI. 00. 
 
 3. Drafting Instruments and Operations. A full descrip¬ 
 tion of drawing instruments and materials, with applications to 
 useful examples; tile work, wall and arch faces, ovals, etc. 7 
 folding plates, many cuts. Large 12mo, cloth, SI.25. 
 
 4. Elementary Projection Drawing. Fully explaining, in 
 six divisions, the principles and practice of elementary plan and 
 elevation drawing of simple solids ; constructive details ; shadows ; 
 isometrical drawing; elements of machines ; simple structures. 
 24 folding plates, numerous cuts. Large 12mo, cloth, Si.50. 
 
 This and No. 3 are especially adapted to scientific, preparatory, 
 and manual-training industrial schools and classes, and to all 
 mechanics for self-instruction. 
 
 5. Elementary Perspective. With numerous practical 
 examples, and every step fully explained. Numerous cuts. Large 
 12mo, cloth, SI.00. 
 
6. Plane Problems on the Point, Straight Line, and Circle. 
 225 problems. Many on Tangencies, and other useful or curious 
 ones. 150 woodcuts, and plates. Large 12mo, cloth, $1.25. 
 
 II. HIGHER WORKS. 
 
 1. The Elements of Descriptive Geometry, Shadows 
 and Perspective, with brief treatment of Trehedrals; Trans¬ 
 versals; and Spherical, Axonometric, and Oblique Projections; and 
 many examples for practice. 24 folding plates. 8vo, cloth, $3.50. 
 
 2. Problems, Theorems, and Examples in Descriptive 
 Geometry. Entirely distinct from the last, with 115 problems, 
 embracing many useful constructions ; 52 theorems, including 
 examples of the demonstration of geometrical properties by the 
 method of projections ; and many examples for practice. 24 fold¬ 
 ing plates. 8vo, cloth, $2.50. 
 
 3. General Problems in Shades and Shadows, with 
 practical examples, and including every variety of surface. 15 
 folding plates. 8vo, cloth, $3.00. 
 
 4. General Problems in the Linear Perspective of 
 Form, Shadow, and Reflection. A complete treatise on the 
 principles and practice of perspective by various older and recent 
 methods; in 98 problems, 24 theorems, and with 17 large plates. 
 Detailed contents, and numbered and titled topics in the larger 
 problems, facilitate study and class use. Revised edition, correc¬ 
 tions, changes and additions. 17 folding plates. Svo, cloth, $3.50. 
 
 5. Elements of Machine Construction and Drawing. 
 73 practical examples drawn to scale and of great variety ; besides 
 30 problems and 31 theorems relating to gearing, belting, valve- 
 motions, screw-propellers, etc. 2 vols., Svo, cloth, one of text, 
 one of 34 folding plates. $7.50. 
 
 6. Problems in Stone Cutting. 20 problems, with exam¬ 
 ples for practice under them, arranged according to dominant 
 surface (plane, developable, warped or double-curved) In each, and 
 embracing every variety of structure; gateways, stairs, arches, 
 domes, winding passages, etc. Elegantly printed at the Riverside 
 Press. 10 folding plates. 8vo, cloth, $2.50. 
 
STEREOTOMY. 
 
 PROBLEMS 
 
 I X 
 
 STONE CUTTING. 
 
 IN FOUR CLASSES. 
 
 I. — PLANE-SIDED STRUCTURES. 
 
 H. — STRUCTURES CONTAINING DEVELOPABLE SURFACES 
 
 III. — STRUCTURES CONTAINING WARPED SURFACES. 
 
 IV. —STRUCTURES CONTAINING DOUBLE-CURVED SUR¬ 
 
 FACES. 
 
 FOR STUDENTS OF ENGINEERING AND ARCHITECTURE. 
 
 S. EDWARD WARREN O. E. 
 
 PROFESSOR IN THE MASSACHUSETTS NORMAL ART SCHOOL, ETC., AND FORMERLY IK 
 THE RENSSELAER POLYTECHNIC INSTITUTE. 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 
 JOHN WILEY AND SON, 
 
 15 Astor Place. 
 
 1888. 
 
 # 
 
sSufcered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1875, by 
 S. Edwakd Warrkn, C. E., 
 in the Office of the Librarian «•/ Congress, at Washington. 
 
 Frcss ofJ.J. Little & Co., 
 Astor Place, New York. 
 
 THE GETTY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
To ALL THOSE GRADUATES OF THE 
 
 RENSSELAER POLYTECHNIC INSTITUTE, 
 
 IK MANY SUCCESSIVE YEARS; WHO DOUBTLESS STILL RETAIN A CLEAR BBC 
 OLLECTION, AND, I HOPE, A PLEASANT REMEMBRANCE 
 OF THE “ OBLIQUE ARCH,” AND THE 
 “ COMPOUND WING-WALL,” 
 
 AS DRAWN BY THEM UNDER MY INSTRUCTION; 
 
 <Cf)ts I title JFoInmr, 1 
 
 WHICH CONTAINS IMPROVED ILLUSTRATIONS OF BOTH, WITH MANY OTHER 
 PROBLEMS, IS MOST KINDLY AND VERY RESPECTFULLY DED¬ 
 ICATED BY THEIR FORMER TEACHER AND 
 LASTING FRIEND 
 
 TIIF. AUTHOR 
 

PBEFACE. 
 
 This manual has been composed with the idea of represent¬ 
 ing, essentially, every class of structures, and every principal 
 variety of surface, so as to make it most widely useful to the 
 student in solving any other problems which he might meet. 
 
 The student needs, desires, and appreciates explicit detailed 
 information in due abundance, not to prevent him from think¬ 
 ing for himself, but to train him to do so by examples fully 
 explained. On this principle, and supported by the best author¬ 
 ities, I have discussed the few problems which could be admit¬ 
 ted within the proposed limits, so thoroughly as to satisfy, I 
 trust, all who enjoy the most — indeed, the only universally 
 — available help, viz., a printed text. 
 
 I have attached scales and dimensions to the problems, which 
 teachers and students may use or not, according as they prefer 
 to work as if drawing actual structures for practical purposes, 
 or to study the purely geometrical principles and operations 
 involved. In either case, the figures should be made, generally, 
 from two to three times as large as those of the plates in this 
 volume, carefully following the text, and under frequent inter¬ 
 rogation by the teacher, in doing so. I should add that this 
 work presupposes a fair acquaintance with descriptive geometry, 
 though many of its problems could be understood after the 
 study of my “ Elementary Projection Drawing.” It is, how¬ 
 ever, complete in itself in regard to several collateral topics 
 required for use in it, and not as conveniently found else¬ 
 where. 
 
 I must here acknowledge my indebtedness to Leroy for 
 suggestions of practical problems, and to Adhemar, in per- 
 
VI 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 fecting the treatment of the oblique arch. It seemed better to 
 take examples essentially like actual structures, rather than 
 imaginary ones, merely for the sake of greater apparent origi¬ 
 nality. But I have in every case made such changes, in vari¬ 
 ous details of design and treatment , including, especially, the 
 novel feature of numerous examples for practice , as to make 
 my volume as much as possible a new contribution as well as a 
 text-book. Moreover, problems VIII. and XV., and the sys¬ 
 tematic arrangement presented in the general table, will not 
 be found elsewhere. 
 
 Newton, Mass.. May, 1875. 
 
NOTE TO TEACHERS. 
 
 Two complete successive courses, elementary and higher, can be 
 made up from this work, as follows : — 
 
 Each problem to be drawn in Plan, Elevation, Section, Details, in 
 isometric or oblique projection, and Developments. 
 
 I. Elementary Course. — a. Plane-sided structures. — 1. The but¬ 
 
 tressed walls (Prob. II.). 2. The plate band (Prob. III.). 
 
 3. A plane-sided wing-wall (Arts. 14-16). 
 
 b. Involving developable surfaces. — [See Arts. 17-28, and Probs. 
 
 IV., V., and XVII. (the bracket), with their examples.] — 
 
 1. The segmental — 2. The full centred — 3. The sloping 
 front— 4. The skew front— 5. The cylindrical-faced — 
 6. The rampant— 7. The conical recessed, arch. 8. The 
 trumpet bracket. 
 
 c. Involving warped surfaces. — 1. Circular stairs around a central 
 
 post. [See Arts. 119-125, and 126.] 2. The warped-faced 
 
 wall (59). 
 
 d. Involving double-curved surfaces. — 1. The Niche (Prob. XVII.) 
 
 2. The dome only (Prob. XIX.). 
 
 II. Higher Course. — Any selection from the above, as introductory, 
 for those who have not previously taken the foregoing elementary 
 course , together with any of the other problems of each of the foui 
 classes noted in the table of contents. 
 
* Illustrated in the text 
 
 Vlll 
 
 STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 GEOMETRICAL CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 The Characteristic Surface. 
 
 Si 
 
 p.® 
 
 3 
 
 f<> 
 [i 
 
 V 
 
 ® 
 
 p< 
 
 a 
 
 ®o 
 
 ■a 
 
 ►—* 
 
 g 
 
 P 
 
 © 
 
 U 2 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 G 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 5 
 
 a 
 
 w 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 Sd 
 
 K 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 
 cr p U 
 
 S3 3* 
 
 P^ 
 
 
 2 
 
 K © S 
 
 SS 
 
 8 o* 
 
 p -< 
 
 ^ p^ 
 
 1 and 
 tress.* 
 
 
 CO CD 
 
 CD P - 
 
 -2 
 
 co 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 V p. 
 
 rt- 
 
 l 
 
 w > 
 
 3 2 3 jl 
 
 £ U) CD £T 
 t/1 . «-> tA 
 
 CD 2 ' 
 
 W w 
 
 03 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 a- 
 
 ■ cd 
 
 75 , 
 
 aq co; 
 
 » r CT 3 
 •*? “ 
 
 13 55 
 
 P 
 
 <rh CA 
 CD CD 
 
 -4 S3 
 ’ CD “4 
 
 ® CD 
 
 .S ** 
 
 '5 s *3 
 
 § 3 
 s v 
 
 O' . 
 
 Ci - 
 
 P - 
 
 •* 
 
 :* .9 
 
 © 
 
 © o © 
 
 © "3 p. 
 
 ©—BP. 
 
 S w 03 g 
 
 P | 
 
 P 
 
 r*- 
 
 CD 
 
 W 
 
 P 
 
 P- 
 
 ** 
 
 hj 
 
 c 
 
 E 
 
 sr 
 
 o 
 
 i 2 »0 
 
 s ® g 3.S 
 
 O S. 2 P* p, 3" “ 
 
 ;r —3 (D CD -Q 
 
 ft, ^ >y> 3 
 
 ^ o 5 ,?a 3 
 
 S3 2- 2- 
 
 CD J '* 3^ 3T 
 
 * ■£* * 
 
 /- N ^ 
 
 © -p © O PI 
 
 S'®=5'2.£ 
 
 'X’oJSm 
 a zl . sr^- 
 2 o p s® p 
 
 H 
 
 p 
 
 CD 
 
 o 
 
 cr 
 
 P 
 
 S3 
 
 P S3 
 
 Pi 3 
 
 Li g. 
 
 ** 
 
 P 
 
 3 P 
 r*- ^ 
 
 S- 
 
 r-r~ 
 
 CT^ 
 
 3 § 
 
 
 S-P* 
 
 p * 
 
 vF 
 
 Ok b — -3 
 
 © © 3-3 C3 © 
 3 ^3 CD O. O -4 
 
 © s SL^og" 
 
 'Js ip ^8 
 
 s r' •-? "4 
 
 ^P K 
 
 >g_ <D 
 _* 
 
 ©» ® §•§, 
 ° 3 ?P 2 
 ^ -3 ^3 *T « 
 ^5 — a CT P 
 
 O CD ^ ^ —' 
 
 s • p p*p 
 
 5 S 3 T 3 
 
 p- P- P- 
 
 C 
 
 3 
 
 2 £3 
 
 3 75 2. 
 
 25^5 
 
 <t> 2 
 
 3 HJ 
 *1 —• 
 
 p (fe 
 
 S r. 
 £L 2 * 
 ** * 
 
 t-O 
 
 gaf 
 
 CD W 2. 
 P CD 3 
 CD -J (0 
 
 £ 
 
 5 
 
 aq 
 
 • 
 
 * 
 
 13 
 
 O'* 
 o > 
 
 3 o 
 
 cd sr 
 S 8 
 
 CA (A 
 
 t-H 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 •—t 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 *o 
 
 o 
 
 •-4 
 
 o* 
 
 5 - 
 
 CN? 
 i -5 r* 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 2.3 
 
 
 2 . 
 
 •9 
 
 5 £ 
 
 
 51 
 
 o 
 
 • P 
 
 
 H- 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 75 
 
 
 
 C* JrjQ 
 
 c - 5 '=. 
 
 * * 
 
 02 
 
 *5 
 
 3T 
 
 Cp 
 
 p 
 
 S' 
 
 w 
 
 r* 
 
 P 
 
 GENERAL TABLE — PRACTICAL CLASSIFICATION. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PAOB 
 
 Preface • • • • » • • / 
 
 Note to Teachers . . . vii 
 
 STEREOTOMY: Stone-cutting : First Principles . . . ) 
 
 CLASS I. 
 
 Plane-Sided Structures. 
 
 PROBLEM I. — To form plane surfaces of stone, making any angle with 
 
 each other . •.4 
 
 PROBLEM II. — A sloping wall, and truncated pyramidal buttress . 5 
 
 PROBLEM III. — The recessed flat arch, or plate-band ... 8 
 
 Plane-sided Wing-Walls .... . . . 10 
 
 CLASS II. 
 
 Structures containing Developable Surfaces. 
 
 Arches. — Definitions.12 
 
 Classification.13 
 
 Preliminary constructions.14 
 
 § Conic Sections .14 
 
 1°. — To construct a circle by points, having given its radius . . 14 
 
 2°. — To construct an arc of a circle by points, knowing its chord 
 
 and versed-sine, or rise..15 
 
 3°. — To construct an ellipse by points on given axes. Also, nor¬ 
 mals to it (two methods).15 
 
 4°. — To construct the arc of a parabola; on a given segment of the 
 axis, and a chord which is perpendicular to the axis. Also, 
 
 normals to it.16 
 
 5°. — To construct an arc of a hyperbola, on a given chord, and seg¬ 
 ment of the axis, perpendicular to the chord . . . 17 
 
 §§ Poly central Arch Curves .18 
 
 Three-Centred Ovals .18 
 
 1°. — To construct the general case of the semi-oval of three centres 18 
 2°. — First special case. The semi-oval of three centres when the 
 
 lesser arc is 60°.18 
 
 3°. — Second special case. The ratio — to be a minimum . . 19 
 
X 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Five-Centred Ovals . . . 20 
 
 4°. — To construct a five-centred semi-oval, which shall conform as 
 
 nearly as possible to a semi-ellipse, on the same axes . 20 
 5°. —To construct the five-centred oval, by a method applicable to 
 
 an oval having any number of centres . . .21 
 
 Illustrations. 
 
 PROBLEM IY. — A three-centred arch in a circular wall . . . .22 
 
 PROBLEM V. — A semi-cylindrical arch, connecting a larger similar gal¬ 
 lery, perpendicular to it, on the same springing plane; with an en¬ 
 closure which terminates the arch by a sloping skew face . . .25 
 
 Groined , and Cloistered Arches .... . . 29 
 
 Theorem I. — Having two cylinders of revolution, whose axes intersect, 
 the projection of their intersection, upon the plane of their axes, is a 
 
 hyperbola. . . 30 
 
 PROBLEM YI. — The oblique groined arch.32 
 
 PROBLEM VII. — The groined and cloistered, or elbow arch . . .35 
 
 Conical, or Trumpet Arches .37 
 
 PROBLEM VIII. — A trumpet in the angle between two retaining walla . 37 
 PROBLEM IX. — A trumpet arched door, on a corner .... 40 
 
 PROBLEM X. — An arched oblique descent . . . . 44 
 
 CLASS III. 
 
 Structures containing Warped Surfaces. 
 
 PROBLEM XI. — The recessed Marseilles gate.49 
 
 The Oblique Arch. 
 
 Preliminary topics .—Elementary mechanics of the arch . . . .53 
 
 The resulting standard, or essentially perfect design for an 
 
 oblique arch.55 
 
 PROBLEM XII. — The partial, and trial construction of the orthogonal, or 
 
 equilibrated arch.50 
 
 The Helix .61 
 
 Theorem II. — The projection of the helix on a plane parallel to its axis 
 
 is a sinusoid.62 
 
 The Helicoid .62 
 
 PROBLEM XIII. — A segmental oblique arch, on the helicoidal system . 63 
 
 I. The Projections. (Arts. 81-104).63 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments.73 
 
 III. The Application.76 
 
 Useful Numerical Data .79 
 
 Modifications of the Orthogonal and Helicoidal Systems . . .81 
 
 Wing- Walls .83 
 
 PROBLEM XIV. — The compound, or piano-conical wing-wall . . 85 
 
 The Conoid .92 
 
 PROBLEM XV. — The conoidal wing-wall.94 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 X’, 
 
 Stairs ...... 97 
 
 PROBLEM XVI. — Winding stairs on an irregular ground plan . . 99 
 
 Other forms of stairs . . ... 
 
 CLASS IV. 
 
 Structures containing Double-Curved Surfaces. 
 
 PROBLEM XVII. — A trumpet bracket, with basin and niche . . . 103 
 
 Theorem III. — The conic section whose principal vertex and point of 
 contact with a known tangent are given, will be a parabola, ellipse, 
 or hyperbola, according as the given vertex bisects the subtangent, 
 or makes its greater segment within or without the curve . .106 
 
 PROBLEM XVIII. — The hooded portal.107 
 
 PROBLEM XIX. — An oblique lunette in a spherical dome . . 110 
 
 Pendentives ........ .114 
 
 Spirals ......... 115 
 
 PROBLEM XX. — The annular and radiant groined arch , 120 
 
STEREOTOMY. 
 
 STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 FIRST PRINCIPLES. 
 
 1. Stereotomy is that application of Descriptive Geometry 
 which, comprehensively defined, treats of the cutting or shap¬ 
 ing of forms, whether material or immaterial, so as to suit cer¬ 
 tain given conditions. 
 
 2. Stereotomy, thus defined, embraces, either by etymology, 
 or established usage, the following subjects : — 
 
 1°. Shades and Shadows , or the cutting of the volume of space 
 from which an opaque body excludes the light, by any given sur¬ 
 face, on which the shadow of the body is thus said to fall. 
 
 2°. Perspective, or the cutting of the cone, of which the ap¬ 
 parent limit of a given body is the base, and the eye the ver¬ 
 tex, by any given plane, whose intersection with this cone is 
 called the perspective of the given body. 
 
 3°. Dialing , or the cutting of metal plates so that their shad¬ 
 ows upon a given surface shall mark the hours of the day. 
 
 4°. Cinematics, or the shaping of mechanical forms , so that 
 by their mutual action they shall produce certain motions. 
 
 5°. Structural articulations, or the shaping of the articula¬ 
 tions of wood and iron framings of every kind, with reference 
 to convenience of construction and use. 
 
 6°. Carpentry, or the cutting of wooden pieces, so that when 
 united they shall form a self-supporting whole. 
 
 7°. Stone-cutting, or the cutting of stone pieces of prescribed 
 form, from the rough block, so that when combined in an as¬ 
 signed order, they shall form a given or predetermined whole. 
 
 Of these, the last two are the most obviously characteristic ; 
 that is, most clearly illustrative of the definition (1). 
 
 3. Stone-cutting as a science embraces three distinct parts: — 
 
 1 °. The construction, on large scales in practice, of the pro¬ 
 jections of at least so much of a proposed structure as will per¬ 
 mit— 
 
 l 
 
2 
 
 STEREOTOM Y. 
 
 2°. The derivation therefrom of the directing instruments , 
 used by the workman as guides in cutting the rough block to 
 its intended form by the chisel and mallet. 
 
 3°. The rules for the application of these directing instru¬ 
 ments in the proper order and manner. 
 
 4. The first two of the three parts just mentioned consist 
 of operations of applied descriptive geometry. The number of 
 directing instruments, and the mode of their application, will 
 depend considerably on the ingenuity of the designer. 
 
 5. Practical stone-cutting , or the actual formation of the 
 finished stone, belongs to the student, only so far as it may, in 
 the absence of models, serve him in gaining familiarity with 
 those complex masonry forms which cannot be readily imag¬ 
 ined from drawings alone. 
 
 In such modelling, the intended pieces would be wrought in 
 plaster, by the aid of their wooden, or paper directors, derived 
 from the drawings. 
 
 6 . Slopes are variously expressed. 1°. In PI. I., Fig. 1, the 
 
 T& 
 
 slope 11" k, for example, may be expressed by the ratio, = 
 
 the tangent of the angle TH"£. Here <^77 = y ; read, a slope 
 of five to one. 
 
 2°. By degrees. Slopes of 30°, 40°, etc., make these angles 
 with the horizontal plane. 
 
 3°. A batter of 1 inch to 1 foot, etc., means a horizontal de¬ 
 parture of one inch from a vertical direction, for each foot of 
 altitude. 
 
 4°. Nearly level slopes, as of railways, are described as a rise 
 of 1 in 100, etc., 40 feet to the mile, etc. 
 
 5°. Once more ; a slope of 45° being naturally described as 
 that of 1 to 1 , every other slope may be described by naming 
 its horizontal component distance first, and by taking its least 
 component as the unit. Thus a slope of 4 horizontal, to 1 ver¬ 
 tical, may be described as a slope of 4 to 1. But one of 1 
 horizontal, to 7 vertical, for instance, as a slope of 1 to 7; or a 
 batter of 1 in 7. 
 
 The nature of the case, or a reference to the figure, will 
 show, in each problem, the meaning of any expression of slope 
 that may be used. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 3 
 
 Directing instruments. 
 
 7. The directing instruments (3) used in stone-cutting are 
 of three kinds, bevels, templets, and patterns. 
 
 Bevels, as the common steel square, give the relative posi¬ 
 tions of required lines, or surfaces of a stone, by showing the 
 angles between them. In the former case they are plane bev¬ 
 els ; in the latter, diedral bevels. 
 
 Templets give the forms of required edges, or other distin¬ 
 guishing lines of a surface. 
 
 Patterns show the forms of plane or of developable surfaces. 
 In the former case, they may be made of any stiff, thin mate¬ 
 rial. In the latter, they must be flexible. 
 
 These instruments will be designated by numbers in the sub¬ 
 sequent problems, and in every case, No. 1 will be a straight¬ 
 edge, and No. 2 the square. 
 
 Notation. 
 
 8. For the sake of brevity, the horizontal and vertical planes 
 of projection will, on account of the frequent reference which 
 must be made to them, be denoted, respectively, as the planes 
 H and V. 
 
 The usual rules for inking visible and invisible, given or 
 auxiliary lines and planes (Des. Geom. 45), will be followed, 
 unless in particular cases greater clearness may result from 
 disregarding them. 
 
 When important lines are hidden by viewing a structure, as 
 usual, vertically downwards from above it, its horizontal pro¬ 
 jection may be inked as if the object were seen by looking at it 
 vertically upward from below it. 
 
 The greater complexity of some of the figures will make it 
 convenient to adopt the rule of distinguishing invisible lines 
 of the structure from the lines of construction, by dotting the 
 former and marking the latter in short dashes ; a distinction 
 not shown, however, on the plates of this volume. 
 
 9. In order to secure a brief, yet comprehensive exhibition of 
 the elements of stone-cutting, that is, one representing every 
 important class of structures, and form of surface, they may 
 be classified as in the General Table, the frontispiece. 
 
CLASS I. 
 
 Plane-Sided Structures. 
 
 Problem I. 
 
 To form plane surfaces of stone , making any given angle with 
 
 each other. 
 
 This fundamental problem, being of constant occurrence, is 
 here separately explained, in order to avoid repetition. 
 
 10. First. Fig. 1. represents the first steps in forming a 
 plane upon a wholly unwrought block. Having two straight¬ 
 edges, AB and CD, of equal width, ledges, asmn and p q, are 
 cut on opposite edges of the stone, until the tops of the 
 straight-edges placed on them, as shown, are found by sight¬ 
 ing, as from E, to be in the same plane. 
 
 The portion of rough stone between m n and p q is then cut 
 away until found, by frequent test with the straight-edge, ap¬ 
 plied transversely, as at FG, to be wrought down to the plane 
 of m n and p q. 
 
 Second. Having prepared one plane surface, as shown in 
 Fig. 2, a second plane face, perpendicular to the former, may 
 be formed, as shown, by cutting two or more channels in any 
 direction on the required face, until one arm, BC, of a square 
 will fit any of them, while the other arm, AB, coincides with 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 5 
 
 the given face, and in a direction perpendicular to the common 
 edge of the two surfaces. The intermediate rough stone is then 
 cut down to the plane of these channels by applying the straight¬ 
 edge transversely to them. For any other than a right angle, 
 use a bevel giving such angle. 
 
 11. The principle of the first operation is, that if two lines, 
 m n and p q , are in the same plane, all lines, as FG, which in¬ 
 tersect them, are in that plane also. 
 
 That of the second operation is, that if two planes are per¬ 
 pendicular to each other, any line, as AB, in one of them, and 
 perpendicular to their intersection, will be perpendicular to all 
 lines, BC, etc., drawn through its foot and in the other plane. 
 
 Problem II. 
 
 A sloping wall and truncated pyramidal buttress. 
 
 I. The Projections (3). — These, PI. I., Fig. 1, are made partly 
 from given linear dimensions, and partly from given slopes of 
 the inclined faces of the buttress and wall. 
 
 The plan and front elevation can be made wholly from data 
 of the kinds just mentioned ; but an end elevation is added, 
 as a check upon errors, and as showing a different method of 
 operation. 
 
 Let the wall be 8 ft. in height, and 3 ft. 6 in. thick at 
 its base, and with a slope of 1 to 6 on its front. Let the ver¬ 
 tical height of the buttress at c" be 7 ft. ; the slope of its front 
 1 to 5, that of its sides 1 to 4, and that of its top 4| to 1 (6). 
 Then — 
 
 1°. Construct the end elevation by making G"m = i of G^E", 
 and A"C" parallel to Win ; also E"N = 10 ft., ON = 2 ft., and 
 H "Jc parallel to OE" ; and C"L = 4 ft. 6 in., LM = 1 ft., and 
 a n c n parallel to MC", having made c"e 1 ft. below C ,r E". 
 
 These operations will give the required slopes seen in the 
 end view. 
 
 2°. The construction of the plan and front elevation of the wall 
 is obvious on inspection, all the heights in elevation being de¬ 
 termined by projecting across from the end view, and all the 
 widths in plan, by transferring the horizontal distances, E^C", 
 etc., from the end view to any convenient line of reference, as 
 ejhi, perpendicular to the ground line. 
 
6 
 
 STEREOTOM Y. 
 
 3°. The projections of the buttress. — The dimensions of its 
 base are, JK = 6 ft.; HI = 4 ft. ; and A^ = 2 ft. 6 in. With 
 these draw the base, whence, by means of the end view and 
 the given slopes, all its lines can be found. 
 
 Thus, ah and cd , drawn indefinitely at first, are at distances, 
 ejb x and e x d x , from EF respectively equal to a'^and c n e. 
 
 The slope of the sides being 1 to 4, draw ij parallel to H J, 
 and at a distance, gi, from it, equal to one fourth of G"E". 
 Then Cj and ij , being in the plane of the top of the wall, J j is 
 the intersection of the face of the wall with the left side of the 
 buttress; and c, its intersection with d x d , is a back upper cor¬ 
 ner of the buttress. Drawing the horizontal a"f , and making 
 epq, =fn", draw n Y n parallel to AB, and from n, draw na par¬ 
 allel to JH, and na will meet ab at a. Then draw ac and nH, 
 which will complete the left side of the buttress. Its right side 
 can be laid off from the axis of symmetry UV. 
 
 The vertical projection of the buttress is made by simply 
 projecting the points of the plan up to the traces H'K 7 , a'h ', 
 and c'd' of the horizontal planes in which they lie, and then 
 joining the points as shown. 
 
 In constructions like that of J j, the pairs of parallels, AJ 
 and HJ ; Cj and ij, which determine the required line, should 
 be as far apart as possible. 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments. — These are, besides Nos. 1 
 and 2 (7), No. 3, a pattern of the base of the upper stone of 
 the buttress, and seen in its true size in plan : No. 4, a bevel 
 containing the diedral angle, shown on the end elevation, be¬ 
 tween the base and the back of the buttress: No. 5, the like 
 angle between the base and front of any buttress stone : No. 6, 
 a bevel giving the angle between the base and either of the 
 sides of the buttress. 
 
 No. 6 is found by revolving any line of greatest declivity, as 
 R h, perpendicular to JH, until parallel to V, as at RA"— R !h nt ; 
 when it will show the true slope of the side of the buttress. 
 No. 9 gives the angle between the top and back of the but¬ 
 tress. 
 
 If patterns are used as checks upon the operation of the bev¬ 
 els, they may be found as follows. 
 
 No. 7 is a pattern of the top of the buttress, and shown in 
 its true form by revolution about cd — c'dj till parallel to V. 
 This is done bv making — a"d' and drawing- a' n h paral- 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 7 
 
 / 
 
 lei to a'b' and limited by the vertical projections, a'a'" and b'b"\ 
 perpendicular to c'd', of the arcs described by aa! and bb' in re¬ 
 volving about cd — c'd'. 
 
 No. 8 is a pattern of the right side of the upper abutment 
 stone, and is shown in its true form by revolving it about PQ 
 — P'Q' till horizontal. Then d" , the revolved position of dd\ 
 may be found by describing an arc with P as a centre and a 
 radius equal to d'P'", shown by the construction to be the true 
 length of P d — P 'd', and noting where it intersects dd" per¬ 
 pendicular to the axis PQ. The point b" being similarly found, 
 PQ b"d" is the required pattern. These patterns would con¬ 
 veniently be open wooden frames. 
 
 III. The Application. — We will here illustrate this topic by 
 the manner of working the top stone of the buttress. This, 
 being the most irregular stone in the problem, the full explana¬ 
 tion of the manner of forming it will enable the student to de¬ 
 vise means for working any of the others. 
 
 Having selected a rough block in which the finished stone 
 might be inscribed, first bring the intended base of the stone to 
 a plane by Prob. I. Next scribe the edges of the base by pat¬ 
 tern No. 3. 
 
 Having thus the bottom edges of all the lateral faces of the 
 stone, these may be wrought from the base, and in their true 
 relative position, by the bevels Nos. 4, 5, and 6. By marking 
 the distances sc" and ra" on bevels Nos. 4 and 5 respectively, 
 the edges ab — a'b' and cd — c'd' will be determined on the 
 stone, which can then be finished by the use of No. 9 and the 
 straight edge. 
 
 For increased accuracy, patterns Nos. 7 and 8, and others 
 similarly found for the front and rear faces of the stone, can be 
 used in determining the edges of the lateral faces more posi¬ 
 tively than by the natural intersection of these faces as found 
 by the bevels and straight edge. 
 
 Examples. — 1°. Construct patterns 10 and 11, of the front and rear faces of 
 the top buttress stone. 
 
 Ex. 2°. Construct a bevel, No. 12, giving the angle between the front, and an 
 adjacent lateral face. 
 
 Ex. 3°. Show the construction and use of the guides necessary in working the 
 stone below the top one of the buttress. 
 
 Ex. 4°. Do. for the top stone, supposing its top surfaces to be a pyramid hav¬ 
 ing its vertex at vv'. 
 
 Ex. 5°. Construct, on a larger scale than in Fig. 5, a plan and front elevation 
 
8 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 of the wall whose end elevation is there shown, with an isometrical figure of the 
 stone NFEDC< 7 - [The inclined surfaces, as pq, help to prevent sliding in the direo 
 tion of the arrow, from the pressure of materials at the back, AN, of the wall.] 
 
 Problem III. 
 
 The recessed flat arch , or plate-hand. 
 
 12. An arch is an assemblage of blocks, mutually support¬ 
 ing, by means of radiating joints between them, and side sup¬ 
 ports to confine them laterally. When the arched surface, 
 usually cylindrical, is plane, the structure is called a Plate- 
 hand. 
 
 I. The Projections. — PI. I., Figs. 2, 3, and 4. The con¬ 
 struction of these will, after a brief description, be sufficiently 
 obvious on inspection of the figures, since, on all of them, the 
 same letter indicates the same point. 
 
 T£ J j —T'T^J'U', Fig. 2, is the rectangular door-way, or 
 opening through a wall. The door, not shown, folds against 
 the vertical plane surface, U / V'J 7 Q / T // S ,/ S , T', which is in the 
 plane qs. The recess which contains the door when shut, is 
 bounded by the surfaces just pointed out, and by the three 
 surfaces, —V'Q'; Q<?Ss — Q'S" ; and. Ss— S'S", all of 
 which are perpendicular to the plane V- 
 
 The surfaces PQ — V'W'P'Q', PQRS — P'Q'R"S", and 
 RS — R'S'R"S", collectively, form the convergent sides, or 
 jambs of the door-way. 
 
 The joints, A'D', etc., divide T"J' into equal parts, and 
 radiate from a point O, found by making OT^J 7 an equilateral 
 triangle. The lapping of the end stones, as Y, over the upper 
 jamb stones, as at G'F', is designed to give greater security. 
 
 Fig. 3 is an oblique projection of the stone A'D'E'F', as seen 
 in looking at it obliquely upward so as to see its front, right- 
 hand, and under surfaces.* The identity of its several sur¬ 
 faces with the same ones as seen in Fig. 2, is shown by the 
 ! lettering. 
 
 Fig. 4 is an isometrical drawing of the upper jamb-stone 
 G'X'N', showing its front, left-hand, and under surfaces. 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments. — Of these the only ones re¬ 
 quiring any further graphical operations for their construction 
 
 * See my Elementary Projection Drawing : DIv. IV. Chap. V., for an 
 explanation of this species of projection. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 9 
 
 are the patterns of the radiating joints. One of these is shown 
 at Vp'p"f , "f"k"'k" , by revolving the joint, vertically projected 
 in f'p r , about that line, considered as in the plane RX, as an 
 axis ; whence p'p"=Rr ; k'k"=cu ; k'k" r =cA, etc. 
 
 The true form of the joint on J'G' may be similarly found. 
 
 A III. The Application. — Let it be required to work the stone 
 A'D'F', Figs. 2 and 3. There is no one precise order of oper¬ 
 ations which is indispensable ; but we should naturally work 
 first, either the top surface, EeDcZ, as the simplest , or the back 
 deaj , or joint on A'D', as the largest and most important. 
 
 Supposing then that we have a block in which the stone can 
 be inscribed, as shown at fhmo; bring the intended joint sur¬ 
 face on A'D' to an indefinite plane by Prob. I., and by the 
 pattern, No. 3, mark its edges. Next, the back and front can 
 both be wrought square with this surface by No. 2, and their 
 edges marked by their patterns A'D'E'F'G'J' (No. 6), and 
 C'D'E'F'G'H 7 (No. 7). The top and bottom surfaces can 
 then be wrought, like all the lateral surfaces, either square 
 with the back, by No. 2; or, from the joint surface A'D' by 
 the bevels Nos. 4 and 5. 
 
 The surfaces on E'F' and G'F' are square with each other 
 and with the front and back. A pattern, No. 8 (not shown), 
 of the joint on J'G( and a bevel, No. 9, set to the angle QPX, 
 between the vertical and jamb surfaces, will suffice for the ac¬ 
 curate completion of the stone. 
 
 13. The stones A'D'F' and G'F'N' cannot be more clearly 
 shown than in Figs. 3 and 4, in which all their most irregular 
 portions are made visible. But the student cannot here be¬ 
 come too familiar with the methods of representation there 
 given, on account of their special usefulness in the drawing of 
 complicated masonry. Hence the nature of a part of the fol¬ 
 lowing examples. 
 
 Ex. 1° Make an isometric drawing of the stone Y, as inscribed in a prism 
 containing its top and bottom faces. 
 
 Ex. 2°. Make the same drawing of Y as inscribed in the prism fhmo. 
 
 Ex. 3°. Make an oblique projection of the upper left-hand jamb-stone. 
 
 Ex. 4°. Draw the instruments, and describe their use, for working the upper 
 jamb stoues as G'E'N 7 . 
 
 Ex. 5°. Devise and describe any other convenient manner of working the stone 
 Y, than that given in the text. 
 
 Ex. 6°. Make the top of the door-way semi-octagonal, by sloping the under 
 sides of Y and A'D'G' at 45° to the vertical sides, on T t and Jj, of the opening. 
 
10 
 
 STEREOTOM Y. 
 
 Plane Sided Wing - Walls. 
 
 14. Wing-walls, are those which flank the approach to anj 
 passage-way, or area, so as to prevent obstructing it. 
 
 15. Pi. I., Figs. 6-9, illustrate in outline the leading forms 
 of plane sided wing-walls; rectilinear , prismatic , and pyram- 
 i dal. 
 
 Fig. 6, a rectilinear wing-wall, AB —A'B', is such as might 
 be used to retain a roadway ascending behind it, and bending, 
 as shown by the arrows, to cross a bridge, one of whose abut¬ 
 ments is CCh Such a construction is often seen where a rail¬ 
 way or canal is crossed at right angles by a road which, on one 
 or both sides of the crossing, is parallel to the railway or canal. 
 
 Fig. 7 represents wing-walls, as abc — Va'o’ , which, with the 
 arch-wall, cd — c'd ] , form three sides of a vertical hollow quad¬ 
 rangular prism , in which the tops of the wing-walls are trun¬ 
 cated by an oblique plane, a'c'd’g’. Had there been a slope or 
 batter to the arch and wing-walls, the inner surfaces, collec¬ 
 tive^, would have formed part of a vertical quadrangular pyra¬ 
 mid. Either construction would serve in case of a railway 
 tunnel occupying the line of a city street. 
 
 Fig. 8 represents wing-walls, which, with the connecting 
 arch-wall, DF, form half of a vertical hollow hexagonal prism, 
 wholly truncated by an oblique plane, AEG — A'E'G' ; and 
 flanking the inlet to a pipe culvert, mn — m'n by which the 
 water of some gulley or small ravine may be led through an 
 embankment. 
 
 Fig. 9 differs from Fig. 8, in that the top of the arch-wall, 
 dstg — d'g’, is horizontal, and the inner faces of the walls form 
 a part of a vertical inverted pyramid. 
 
 16. A coping is a layer of thin stones, laid on the top of a 
 wall, and made broader than the thickness of the wall, which 
 they cover, for the purpose of sheltering the joints from the 
 weather, while their adaptation to this end and the effect of 
 their shadows, add to the beauty of the whole. 
 
 Had the arcli-wall, Fig. 9, been truncated by the horizontal 
 plane P'Q', it might have received a coping, whose front edge 
 would have been, in plan, at pq, formed by projecting r' at r. 
 Lines between, and parallel to be and/Ar, would represent the 
 front of the copings of the wing-walls. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 11 
 
 Problems I. — III. will enable the student to work the fol¬ 
 lowing — 
 
 Examples. — 1°. Draw PI. I., Fig. 7, to scale from measurements, with a section 
 on the plane nNw', and describe the cutting of a stone at the corner dd', which, to 
 break joints with courses below, shall extend from If in the arch-wall, cd, to p; 
 in the wing-wall, ee'. 
 
 Ex. 2°. Draw PI. I.,'Fig. 8, in like manner, making the vertical joint surfaces, 
 perpendicular to ED and FG, and describe, with an isometrical or oblique projec¬ 
 tion, the working of the top stones at one of the angles D or F. 
 
 Ex. 3°. In Ex. 2°, let there be a coping, and let the top be truncated as at F'Q', 
 Fig. 9. 
 
 Ex. 4°. Treat PI. 1, Fig. 9, as described in Ex. 2°. 
 
 Ex. 5°. In Ex. 4, let there be a coping. Also add square piers at the foot of 
 the wing-walls, each side of which in plan shall be equal to ac, and whose 
 height shall be a'a" 
 
CLASS II. 
 
 Structures containing Developable Surfaces. 
 
 17. Walls having either cylindrical or conical faces, will be 
 treated incidentally, in connection with other constructions of 
 which they form a part. 
 
 Arches (12) include as particular cases, portals or arched 
 openings through walls ; and combined, or groined , and clois¬ 
 tered arches. Vaults include, more comprehensively, domes, 
 and other over-arched areas. 
 
 Only cylindrical arches will now be considered, and under 
 the heads of, — 
 
 1°. Definitions. IIP. Preliminary Constructions. 
 
 IP. Classification. IY°. Practical Illustrations. 
 
 1°. — Arches — Definitions. 
 
 18. Arch Masses. — The supporting walls of an arch are 
 called its abutments when backed by earth, etc., and piers, 
 when exposed on all sides. The superincumbent masonry, 
 supported by the arch, is called the spandril, or baching. 
 
 Each row of blocks extending through the length of the 
 arch is a course. Each block in the course is an arch-stone, 
 or voussoir. The extreme voussoirs of each course are the 
 quoins , or ring-stones. The middle ring-stone is the keystone. 
 
 19. Arch Surfaces. — The end surfaces of an arch are its 
 faces , a'd' — uQDcZ, PI. III., Fig. 27. (In certain cases, where 
 the elevation is more important, or naturally made first, the 
 accented letters are attached to the plan (8) ). The inner 
 cylindrical surface, ABD, is the intrados. The outer one, 
 whether cylindrical, Fig. 29, or plane-sided, Fig. 27, is the 
 extrados. The top of the abutment, if level, is called the 
 springing plane ; if inclined radially, the skew-back. 
 
 The longer sides, mm'rr', Fig. 26, of a voussoir, are its beds, 
 and are continuous from stone to stone. Its ends, are its heads , 
 and these terminate, or break, in the coursing surfaces. Its in¬ 
 ner side is its soffit; the outer, its back. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 13 
 
 20. Arch Lines. — The intersections of the faces with the 
 intrados and extrados are the face lines of the arch, and of 
 those surfaces. The intersections of the springing plane, or 
 the skew-back, with the same surfaces, are the springing lines. 
 The axis joins the centres of the face lines, and is parallel to 
 the springing lines in an arch of uniform cross section, and is 
 also straight in a cylindrical, and a conical arch. The edges, 
 parallel to the axis, of the courses are the coursing joints; 
 the transverse edges of the voussoirs are the heading joints ; 
 the edges lying in the thickness of the arch are the radial 
 joints , and the joints in the face are the face joints. The 
 span is the perpendicular distance between the springing lines. 
 The rise is the greatest height of the intrados above the span. 
 
 21. Arch Points. — The highest point of any right section of 
 an arch is its crown. The'intersection of the axis with the 
 face is the face centre. When the face joints radiate from any 
 other point than the face centre, such point is called a focus. 
 
 11 °. — Arches — Classification. 
 
 22. Arches may be classified according to either, 1°, th o, form 
 of the intrados ; 2°, the relation of the axis to other parts ; or 
 3°, the forms of the face lines. 
 
 The two former are the most important grounds of division, 
 since they give rise to more radical differences of design. The 
 latter occasions only the many minor modifications of form. 
 
 23. Arches, divided according to the forms of their intra- 
 dos , are plane, developable , warped , or double-curved. 
 
 Plane arches have been illustrated in Prob. III. 
 
 Developable arches are those in which the intrados is near¬ 
 ly always cylindrical. 
 
 Warped and double-curved arches will be treated in con¬ 
 nection with other problems involving like surfaces. 
 
 24. Arches, divided according to the direction of the axis , 
 relative to other parts, are right , oblique , descending , and ram¬ 
 pant. 
 
 A right arch is one in which the axis is horizontal , and the 
 planes of the faces at least so nearly perpendicular to it that 
 the coursing joints can all be parallel to the axis. The face 
 may be oblique to H, when it has a batter; or oblique to a 
 vertical plane through the axis, when it is a s&ew-face. It may 
 be oblique to both of these planes at once. 
 
14 
 
 STEREOTOM Y. 
 
 25. The oblique arch , properly so called, is one in which tlio 
 coursing joints, in order to be nearly or quite perpendicular 
 to the face, are not parallel to the axis, the latter being hori¬ 
 zontal, and oblique to the horizontal lines of the face. 
 
 26. A descending arch is one whose axis is inclined to a 
 horizontal plane. 
 
 A rampant arch is one in which one springing line is higher 
 than the other. The descending arch is also sometimes called 
 rampant. The two cases may then be distinguished as longi¬ 
 tudinally rampant , when one end of the axis is higher than the 
 other, and transversely rampant, when one springing line is 
 higher than the other. 
 
 27. Arches, divided according to the form of the face line, 
 may be circular, elliptic, parabolic , etc., according to the form 
 of the right section of the intrados. They are also depressed, 
 PI. II., Figs. 13, 15, or super-elevated, Fig. 14, according as 
 the rise (20) is less or more than half of the span. They are 
 also pointed , if, as in Fig. 14, the right section is composed of 
 intersecting arcs. 
 
 When the right section of an arch is a semicircle, semi¬ 
 ellipse, etc., the arch is said to be full-centred. When this 
 curve is less than a half one, the arch is called segmental. 
 
 28. When the right section is compound, having three, five, 
 or many centres, the arch is said to be three-centred, etc., or 
 polycentral , PI. Ilfc, Figs. 11, 21. 
 
 IIP. — Arches — Preliminary Constructions. 
 
 § Conic Sections. 
 
 1°. — To construct a circle by points, having given its 
 radius. 
 
 29. Let Oe, PI. II., Fig. 10, be the radius of the required 
 circle, and cd — 20e the diameter perpendicular to Oe. Draw 
 ep and cp , which, with O c and Oe, will form a square, and 
 hence be tangent at c and e. Divide Oe and ep into the same 
 number of equal parts, numbered as in the figure. Then lines 
 radiating from c and d, through the like points on ep and Oe, 
 respectively, will meet at points v, r, etc., of the circle whose 
 radius is O c. For Ofd and cgp are equal right triangles, and 
 the angle Odf is moreover common to the triangles Of d and 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 15 
 
 One. Then by subtraction, the angles ned and 0 fd are equal, 
 which makes the triangles Ofd and den, similar, and hence den 
 right angled at n. Hence n is a point of the semicircle whose 
 diameter is cd. 
 
 2°.— To construct an arc of a circle by points, knowing 
 its chord and versed-sine or rise. 
 
 30. Let 2 cb, PL II., Fig. 15, be the given chord, and ab the 
 given rise of the required arc. Draw ac, and ce perpendicular 
 to it, and limited by the tangent ae at a ; also cn parallel to 
 ab. Then divide cb , ae, and cn, each into the same number 
 of equal parts, and number them as in the figure. Then lines 
 joining like points on cb and ae, will meet those radiating from 
 a to the points on cn in points of the required arc. 
 
 Parallels to O c and Oe , Fig. 10, from any point of the arc 
 ce, will show the correctness of this construction, and of points 
 as h on the arc ac, Fig. 15, produced. 
 
 Making cd radial and equal to aa' we may likewise, as seen 
 in the figure, construct the concentric arc a'c' of the extrados 
 of a segmental arch (27). 
 
 31. The radius of the segmental arch, given by its span and 
 rise, may be desired, and may be found thus. PI. II., Fig. 
 15. 
 
 Let C, intersection of abC and rC, the bisecting perpendicu¬ 
 lar to ac, be the centre of the arc ac. Then let R = C a ; s — 
 be and v = ab. Now ab : ac :: ar : aC. 
 
 Whence aC = a - X - ar . 
 
 ab 
 
 But ar = | ac ; hence 
 
 aO = 
 
 ac‘ 
 2 ab 
 
 S 1 -]- V 3 
 
 2v 
 
 3°. — To construct an ellipse by points on given axes. Also, 
 normals to it. 
 
 32. Let AB and CD be the given axes, PL II., Fig. 16. 
 Then as the projection of a circle seen obliquely is an ellipse 
 (Des. Geom., Theor. VI.), the curve may be found as at a, b, 
 c, as in Fig. 10, as is evident by comparing Figs. 10 and 16. 
 
 In an elliptic arch the face joints should be normal to the 
 elliptic face line of the intrados. 
 
 33. Construction of normal Face Joints. First Method. — 
 
16 
 
 STEREOTOMY 
 
 Let N be a point at which such a joint is to be drawn. With 
 C or D as a centre, and a radius equal to A h, describe arcs 
 intersecting AB at F and F', which are the foci of the ellipse. 
 Then the normal Nm, at N, bisects the angle FNF'. 
 
 34. Second Method. — The normal at any point being 
 perpendicular to the tangent at the same point, to draw the 
 normal at T, for example; describe an arc as A£, with cen¬ 
 tre 7i, and radius A A, and produce c7T, perpendicular to AB, to 
 meet this arc at t. This arc may represent the circle, which, 
 when revolved about *AB till oblique to the paper, is projected 
 in the given ellipse. Then draw the tangent £K to the arc, 
 and as K, being in the axis AB, remains fixed, KT is the tan¬ 
 gent to the ellipse at T. Then T&, perpendicular to KT, at 
 T, is the required normal at T. 
 
 4°.— To construct the arc of a parabola; on a given seg¬ 
 ment of the axis, and the chord which is perpendicular 
 to the axis. Also, normals to it. 
 
 35. On comparing Figs. 10, 16, and 20, PI. II., and knowing 
 from geometry (Des. Geom., Arts. 206-209), that the several 
 conic sections have certain general properties in common, their 
 construction may be put in general terms applicable to all cases, 
 thus. Points of any conic section are found at the intersection 
 of sets of lines which radiate from the two vertices of an axis 
 of the curve ; those from one vertex radiating to points of equal 
 division on the common perpendicular to the chord and to 
 the tangent at that vertex; and those from the other vertex, to 
 like points on the semi-chord, in the manner shown in the fig¬ 
 ures. Thus, PI. II., Fig. 20, let AU be a semi-chord, and BU 
 a segment of the axis of a required parabola. Draw the tan¬ 
 gent BV, limited by AV, parallel to BU. Divide AV and 
 AU into the same number of equal parts, and number like 
 points, reckoned from A, with like numbers. Then radials 
 from B to the points on AV, will meet radials from the oppo¬ 
 site vertex (B') of the axis BU to like points on AU, in points, 
 A, c, N, etc., of the parabola. But note that as the axis is of 
 infinite length, the radials from its infinitely distant extremity, 
 B', will be parallel to BU as shown at Nwi, etc. 
 
 The figure further shows a depressed gothic arch, each half 
 composed of parabolic arcs, as AB and DE. 
 
 36. Construction of the Normal Joints. — Let such a joint 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 IT 
 
 be constructed at N. Draw NN' perpendicular to the axis 
 BU, make BT = BN', and TN will be the tangent at N by 
 the property that the subtangent, N'T, is bisected by the 
 vertex, B, of the curve. Then Nn, the normal, is perpendicular 
 to the tangent NT. 
 
 In the parabola, the sub-normal N 'n is constant; hence, to 
 construct any other normal, as at e, we have only to draw ee r 
 perpendicular to BU, make e'h' = N'w, and h!e will be the nor¬ 
 mal at e. 
 
 37. PL II., Fig. 13, represents a depressed gothic arch 
 formed of circular arcs, in imitation of Fig. 20. The con¬ 
 struction (Draft. Insts. & Oper. p. 91) may be obvious on in¬ 
 spection. The joints in each arc radiate to the centre of that 
 arc. Fig. 14 represents a pointed or lancet gothic arch, where 
 the radii, as ea and cb, are greater than the span, de. 
 
 5. — To construct an arc of a hyperbola, on a given chord, 
 and segment of the axis perpendicular to the chord. 
 
 38. This form of the conic section is seldom needed by the 
 mason. Yet to complete the series of similar constructions it 
 is here given. Let aa', PI. II., Fig. 18, be the chord, and Ve 
 the segment of the axis. Make a't' and at equal and parallel 
 to Ve, and divide at and ae similarly, as in the previous ex¬ 
 amples. Then, WY being that axis of the hyperbola which 
 is perpendicular to the given chord aa\ radials from Y to the 
 points on at will meet those from W, to the like numbered 
 points on ae, in points as 5, c , £?, of the required hyperbola. 
 
 39. This construction is essentially the perspective of that 
 of Fig. 10 on a plane so placed as to cut the visual cone whose 
 base is the circle, in a hyperbola ; while that of Fig. 20 is 
 similarly the perspective of Fig. 10 upon a plane cutting the 
 visual cone whose base is the circle, in a parabola. 
 
 40. In Figs. 16, 18, and 20, we may substitute any chord 
 and its conjugate diameter (that is, the one which bisects the 
 given chord and its parallel tangent) for the axis and a chord 
 perpendicular to it; since such constructions would merely be 
 the projections, or perspectives of Fig. 10 on planes not paral¬ 
 lel to either of the given diameters, O c and Oe. 
 
 a 
 
IS 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 §§ Polycenlral Arch-Curves. 
 
 41. The practical convenience of circular, above that of 
 other curved work, with other reasons which will appear, has 
 led to the frequent adoption of artificial, or compound curves, 
 composed of circular arcs of different radii, in place of the true 
 conic sections; especially in case of separate elliptic arches, 
 i. e. when not combined as in groined arches. And as there 
 will be found to be a choice in the relative lengths of these 
 radii, they should not be chosen arbitrarily, but so as to give the 
 best proportions to the intended oval, as will next be shown. 
 
 Tliree-Centred Ovals. 
 
 1°. To construct the general case of the semi-oval of three 
 centres. 
 
 42. In PL II., Fig. IT, let ab and bg be the given semi-axes 
 of the proposed curve. Assume ac at pleasure, but less than 
 bg; make ge = ac, and draw ce ; bisect ce by the perpendicular 
 to it, fd , meeting gb produced at d. Then will c , d, and a 
 point c Y , .taken on ab produced so that bc x — be, be the three 
 centres of the required oval. 
 
 43. From this beginning, the following investigation leads to 
 useful special cases. Let 
 
 ab = a; bg = b ; ac — r ; dg — R. 
 
 Then from the triangle bed we have, 
 
 (a ?) 2 = (5c ?) 2 -f- (5c) 2 . 
 r) 2 = (R —5) 2 + (a — r) 2 
 _ a? -\- 5 2 — 2 ar 
 
 That is (R 
 whence 
 
 and 
 
 a 2 +5 2 
 r = — 1 — 
 
 2 (5 — r) 
 
 2 bR 
 
 2 (a — R) 
 
 ( 1 ) 
 
 ( 2 ) 
 
 ( 3 ) 
 
 equations which obviously allow an infinite number of solutions 
 for the same given axes ; as the construction shows, where 
 ac, = r, was assumed at pleasure, only less than bg ; and thence 
 R was found. 
 
 2°. First special case. The semi-oval of three centres, 
 when the lesser arc is 60°. 
 
 44. Let the arc am, PI. II., Fig. 11, = 60° ; whence bed = 
 edd— 60°, and the arc mn — 60°. Now put r = a - - x, where 
 be = x , then R = md = ad = a 4- x. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 19 
 
 Substituting these values of R and r in (1) Art. 43, we find 
 x l — (a — b)x = -— 
 whence, neglecting the negative value of x, 
 
 x — —2— 4 " —2— ^ 3 ’ ( 4 ) 
 
 which is constructed as follows : 
 
 Take bf = a — b, bh = —, and on fh describe a semi¬ 
 circle ; in which (bkf = bh X bf. Then describe the arc ke 
 from h as a centre, which will give be — x. Then make be' = be 
 and ede' an equilateral triangle on cc', which will give the three 
 centres required. 
 
 For, as bf = 2 bh; (bkf = bh X 'Zbh = 2 (bh) 2 
 
 and (hkf — (bhf -f- ( bkf = 3 (bhf 
 
 or, (h¥) = (M)V 3 "= (a 
 
 then be = bh -j- hk = a --- - -f- = a? 5 and 
 
 r = a — #, and R = a -f- # as required. 
 
 45. The curve in Fig. 11 has the advantage, in application 
 to bridge arches, that when b is > f a, it affords a greater in¬ 
 terior capacity for the flow of water than does an ellipse on the 
 same axes. For the radius of curvature at a , Fig. 17, of the 
 
 b 2 
 
 ellipse on ab and bg as semi-axes, is r x = - , but 
 
 ( a — b . a — b .-5- \ 
 
 —2-T —g— V 3 } 
 
 Now when b = § a, 
 
 r x = — a = .444 a. 
 
 a 9 
 
 but r = (l— 1 + 6 v/ ~ 5 ) a = M5 a ■ 
 
 R 
 
 3°. Second special case. The ratio - to be a minimum. 
 
 46. From Eq. (2) Art. 43, f = + 
 
 Differentiating by the rule for fractions (a and 5, constants) 
 dividing by dr, and placing the result = 0, we have 
 
 d 2L = d ^ = ar 2 — (a 2 + 6 2 ) r + (a 2 + 6 2 ) = 0; 
 
 dr 
 
20 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 which solved with respect to r gives, after reducing, and neg¬ 
 lecting that value of r which makes r > 
 
 ^_ \/« 2 + ^ ( V « 2 + b 2 — (a — b) 
 
 a V 2 
 
 Equating this with (3) and reducing, 
 
 v. — /V^ = R 2 + ( a —*) 
 
 6 V 2 
 
 The direct reduction being somewhat tedious, note the sym¬ 
 metry of Eqs. (2) and (3), where (3) is obtained by substitut¬ 
 ing a for b and R, for r in (2) ; and it will be obvious that (6) 
 is obtained from (5) by a like substitution. 
 
 47. The construction , which is very simple, is shown in PI. 
 II., Fig. 19. Draw the chord ae, make ef = a — f>, bisect af 
 by the perpendicular gd , meeting eb produced, and ab , at d and 
 c, the required centres for the half curve aoe. For, the similar 
 triangles age , aeb, and gde give 
 
 r = ac= “ X ag = — 
 and H = de — ~ X eg = — 
 
 Five-Centred Ovals. 
 
 4°. To construct a five-centred semi-oval, which shall con¬ 
 form as nearly as possible to a semi-ellipse on the same 
 axes. 
 
 48. Five-centred ovals are preferable to three centred ones, 
 
 when ~ ^ ; and are generally most pleasing when, as here 
 
 required, they most nearly resemble an ellipse, described on 
 the same axes. In PI. II., Fig. 21, let fg = \ ag. It is a prop¬ 
 erty of the ellipse that its radius of curvature, at the extremity 
 of the minor axis, is a third proportional to the semi-minor and 
 semi-major axes. Hence make fe — Zga and e is one of the 
 five centres. Again, the radius of curvature at the extremity 
 of the major axis, is a third proportional to the semi-major and 
 semi-minor axes, hence, make ca — c'b = \fg, and c and d will 
 be two other centres. Now, since the radius of curvature of an 
 ellipse is changing continually, a radius may be found which 
 shall be a mean proportional between the radii already found, 
 and such a radius is also a mean proportional between the 
 semi-axes, for/<g : ga :: gf : ac ; . *. fe X ac = ga X gf 
 
 \/a 2 -}- b 2 — (a — &)\ 
 2 ) 
 a 2 -f b 2 (s/a 2 -f *2 -f ( a — b)\ 
 
 b V 2 ; 
 
 a 2 -f b 2 ( 
 a \ 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 21 
 
 that is, R X r = a X 5, and calling 
 the intermediate radius r x , we have by hypothesis, 
 
 rj = R . r. Hence r? — a . b . 
 that is, a : r x : : r x : b. 
 
 Hence make gj =gf, describe a semicircle on aj ; draw gk, 
 and we have gk, a mean proportional between ag, = a, and 
 gj , = 5, and hence equal to the radius r x . Now make if=gk; 
 draw the arc did'; make ah = gk ; draw the arc 7idf, and simi¬ 
 larly draw h'd'; then d and d' are the remaining centres; for fe 
 may be regarded as containing all the lesser radii found in 
 moving from f to a about e as a centre; i. e., at some point 
 of the motion of ef about e, it becomes = d m. Likewise ah 
 may be regarded as containing all the radii greater than ac, 
 found in moving ab about c as centre, i. e ., at some point of 
 the motion of ab about c, ac becomes = dm , hence d must be 
 at the intersection of arcs di and dh, drawn with e and c re¬ 
 spectively as centres, ah and fi each being equal to r x . A 
 general construction of the five-centred oval is given in my 
 “ Drafting Instruments and Operations,” p. 92. 
 
 5°. To construct the five-centred oval, by a method ap¬ 
 plicable to an oval having any number of centres. 
 
 49. See PI. II., Fig. 12, where, as before, put ao = a , and 
 bo — b. The problem is indeterminate when the extreme radii 
 R and r are both chosen arbitrarily, for calling r x — the inter¬ 
 mediate radius, we have cd — r x — r, and c"c' — R — r x ; mak¬ 
 ing but two equations for the three unknown quantities cc\ 
 c"c\ and r x . Note that as cc' -f- c'c" = R — r, the centre d 
 will be on an ellipse whose foci are c and c", and whose major 
 axis is R — r. 
 
 In order to render the problem determinate, put 
 
 1°, oc" — 3 oe , i. e. 
 
 R — 5 = 3 (a — r), then, 2°, ec" = £ oc", and 
 
 3 °, cd — ^ co. 
 
 The problem can now be solved geometrically, and without 
 assuming any of the required radii, thus. Assume ag; make 
 og" — 3 og ; bisect og" at e'; join g and e', and with g as a centre, 
 and radius ag, describe the arc aG. Then take dg = ^ og; 
 draw dg" , which will cut ge' in a point g', which is the centre 
 of the arc GV; and g" is the centre of the arc VC. In 
 general, however, it is useless to draw the arcs as these will 
 not be, except by accident, the ones required. 
 
22 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 But the polygons, ogg'g n , and occ’c ", having their sides made 
 proportional, will always be similar, hence if we put, 
 oc —x; og = p ; cc'-^-dc" = z; 
 oc" = y ; og" — q; gg'+g’g" = «, 
 we shall have 
 
 x _ y x _ 
 
 p~q’ P~ 
 from which after eliminating z , 
 
 (« 
 
 and z-\-a — x — y-±b. 
 
 x : 
 
 P and y = ( "“ J) ? 
 
 p + q — s * p+q — s 
 
 or, when as was assumed, q = 3 jo, then y = 3a;, and 
 
 (1) and y = ^=M Z 
 4p — s 47 4jo — s 
 
 ( 2 ) 
 
 I V°. — Arches — Illustrations. 
 
 Problem IV. 
 
 A three-centred arch in a circular wall. 
 
 I. The Projections. In PI. III., Fig. 22, a'a"d'd" is the 
 plan of a segment of the wall, 4 feet 7 inches thick, of a 
 circular room, which has a radius, C'b ( = bb ") of 25 feet 8 
 inches. This wall is pierced by a horizontal cylinder, whose 
 axis C"C' — C, intersects the vertical line, at 5, that of the 
 room, at 5, C, and whose right section is ABD ; forming an 
 arch, whose span, AD, is 17 feet 4 inches; rise, CB, is 6 feet 
 2 inches ; interior height, GB, is 17 feet 2 inches; and height 
 to top of keystone is 20 feet 2 inches. 
 
 The face line, ABD, is found by (47) the joints radiate to 
 the centres O, d and c", and are adjusted to the horizontal 
 joints of eleven equal courses of stone, each 22 inches thick. 
 
 From these numerical data, and general descriptions, the 
 drawings can be made (better on at least a scale of ?V) and, 
 in the plan, should show all the coursing joints (20) of one 
 half of the intrados, as e'" is shown at e 4 e 5 . 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments. In illustration of the 
 derivation of these from the projections of the arch, we shall 
 consider some one stone. Let it be vinpqr. As usual, the 
 instruments required will be of two kinds: patterns to deter- 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 23 
 
 mine the forms of the faces of the stone ; and bevels to deter¬ 
 mine their relative positions (7). 
 
 1°. The pattern, No. 3, of the top, pq, will be the figure 
 P'P"Q'Q", seen in its real size in the plan. 
 
 2°. That of the side on qr, No. 4, will be simply a rectangle, 
 of width qr , and length Q Q". 
 
 3°. That of the radial bed on mr, No. 7, requires the con¬ 
 struction of the true form of the elliptical face-joint, mr — M'Q'. 
 As this construction is the same for all such joints, it is here 
 given for them all. (See Des. Geometry, Part I, Problem 
 LXXXIX., 2°.) The circle of radius CK = bb" = bC', is the 
 horizontal, and the tangents to it, as K h, are the vertical pro¬ 
 jection of the vertical cylinder of revolution , from which the 
 face-joints, mr, np, are cut, as at e'e, e n g, etc., by planes cf, 
 c"h, etc., perpendicular to V» and oblique to the axis of the 
 cylinder. These planes will therefore cut the cylinder in 
 ellipses whose semi-transverse axes are cf, c"h, etc.; and 
 whose semi-conjugate axes are each equal to the radius, CK, 
 of the cylinder. 
 
 These ellipses, being thus known by their axes, each may be 
 shown first by revolving it into, or parallel to a plane of pro¬ 
 jection ; or, second, all may be shown in one figure constructed 
 on a common conjugate axis. 
 
 First Method. The plane of np, may be revolved to the 
 right about the axis ; sb'" — np, parallel to the vertical plane, 
 when, after revolution, b’"W will appear at nW n ; &M' at jj", 
 and sP' at pp" ; all perpendicular to np. Then p"j n W" will 
 be the true form of the elliptic arc, N'P' — np, forming a face 
 joint. Others may be similarly found. 
 
 Second Method. Again, in Fig. 25, lay off from K', on K'H 
 produced, a distance = KC, from Fig. 22, giving a point O. 
 Then on a perpendicular to ICO, at O, lay off, from O, dis¬ 
 tances to the left, equal to the semi-transverse axes, CK (of the 
 circular right section in the plane CK) cf, c"h, etc., and con¬ 
 struct quarter ellipses on K'O and these several semi-transverse 
 axes. Finally, since CD, e'e', c"e", etc., are the perpendicular 
 distances of the inner extremities, D, e', e", etc., of the joints 
 from the conjugate axes, perpendicular to the paper at G, c', c", 
 etc., lay off these distances from O on the semi-transverse 
 axes in Fig. 25, giving points from which draw ordinates, par¬ 
 allel to K'O, which will give D, e’, e ", e etc., corresponding 
 
24 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 to D, e\ e" e'", etc., in Fig. 22. The elements of the intrados 
 being parallel to the conjugate axes, at C, c r , etc., of the ellip¬ 
 ses, Fig. 22; aDc, de'f, ge"i , etc., Fig. 25, are bevels giving 
 the true forms and positions of the face-joints DcZ, e'e, e"g , 
 etc., Fig. 22, relative to the elements of the intrados. 
 
 Returning to the joint np ; pp", jj", and nW n , being revolved 
 positiops of lines parallel to the axis of the arch, if we lay off, 
 from p", j" and N", on these lines px*oduced, distances equal 
 to N'N", M'M" and P'P", we shall have the true form of the 
 face-joint, np — N^P", and of the pattern No. 5, of the radial 
 bed N'N"M/M". The pattern of the radial bed at mr may 
 be similarly found. 
 
 4°. The soffit mn. The patterns of this, and of all the other 
 like surfaces, are shown on the development, Fig. 28, of the 
 entire intrados, ABD, of the arch. The length of this devel¬ 
 opment, =2AC, Fig. 28, = 2AwmB, Fig. 22. Projecting over 
 GI from M'M", and HJ from N'N", and proceeding likewise 
 for the other stones, we get GHIJ as the pattern No. 6, of the 
 surface mn — M , M"N , N ,/ , for example. 
 
 5°. The patterns, Nos. 8 and 9, of the two faces of the stones 
 will be found at once by developing the concave, and the con¬ 
 vex cylindrical faces, A'C'D', and A^C^D", of the arch. 
 
 6°. Having now the patterns of all the faces of the stone mn 
 pq, their relative position may be determined by the square as 
 shown at S; a bevel No. 10, set to the angle npq , and an arch 
 square, as VY, No. 11. 
 
 7°. Both plane beds being first finished, the templet vw, No. 
 13, might replace No. 11. 
 
 III. Application. This, so far as not already evident from 
 the description of the directing instruments, would be as fol¬ 
 lows. 
 
 Taking the stone just considered, the radial bed on np , 
 would first be wrought by No. 1, the straight edge, and the 
 pattern No. 6. Thence the top could be wrought by No. 10, 
 and the pattern, No. 3 ; and the soffit, by No. 11, and the pat¬ 
 tern, No. 6. Also No. 2, held in planes parallel to the face qr, 
 will give elements of the cylindrical faces of the stone in their 
 true relation to the top pq. Or, a frame TT', No. 12, whose 
 parallel bars TT and T'T' are curved to the radius of the face, 
 and held in planes parallel to the top, pq, would give circular 
 lines of the face, between which No. 1, held perpendicularly to 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 25 
 
 TT, would test the proper cutting away of the intermediate 
 rough stone. 
 
 Examples.— 1°. Substitute for the circular wall, shown in the plan, a straight 
 wall, with a sloping face, as shown in Fig. 24, and make the isometrical drawing 
 of any one of the stones; as indicated in Fig. 26 when the batter is on the front. 
 
 Ex. 2°. Make the isometric drawing, Fig. 23, of a stone from the cylindrical 
 wall. 
 
 Ex. 3°. Construct any of the arches already described, on Pis. II. and III. on a 
 large scale ; with an isometrical drawing of any one of the stones ; also a develop 
 ment of all the faces of one stone into the plane of the paper. 
 
 Ex. 4°. Do. for PI. III., Fig. 27. 
 
 Ex. 5°. Db. for PI. III., Fig. 29, supplying a plan, and batter at one end. 
 
 Ex. 6°. In Prob. IV. let the face of the arch be in a vertical plane, but oblique to 
 the axis of the arch. 
 
 Ex. 7°. Let the arch, either segmental or full centred, be in a recess, with diver¬ 
 gent sides, as in the plate band, Prob. III .; and therefore conical above the spring¬ 
 ing lines. 
 
 Problem V. 
 
 u 
 
 It 
 
 - 3 
 
 - T<T* 
 
 = 3'. 
 = 4' : 
 = 6 ' : 
 = 2 ' : 
 = 5' : 
 
 6 ". 
 
 6 '". 
 
 3". 
 
 4". 
 
 A semi-cylindrical arch , connecting a larger similar gallery , 
 perpendicular to it , on the same springing plane; with an in¬ 
 closure which terminates the arch by a sloping shew-face. 
 
 I. The projections. PI. IV., Figs. 30-32. 
 
 1°. Let the following be the given dimensions. 
 
 Skew (24) of the oblique wall PQC 4 , = 18°. 
 
 Batter “ “ “ “ “ 
 
 Radius, 0'A( of intrados of arch 
 O’a' “ extrados “ “ 
 
 O'K, “ intrados of gallery 
 Least thickness of wall 
 Greatest “ “ “ 
 
 Let the springing plane be taken as the plane H> and let the 
 given thicknesses of the wall be in it; and let the plane V be 
 perpendicular to the axis, 0"0 — O', of the required arch. 
 Let there be five voussoirs, dividing the section A'E'B', of the 
 intrados equally, and let them be completed by horizontal and 
 vertical planes, as C'D' and G'C', through the outer extrem¬ 
 ities, D' and G r , of the radial beds. 
 
 Then, with a scale of not less than = 2' to 1", in order to 
 be more easily accurate, the given dimensions can be drawn, as 
 shown, where JR is the horizontal trace of the vertical side of 
 the wall. t 
 
 JR — KR' is one springing line of the gallery, all of whose 
 
26 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 elements are therefore parallel to JR, in front of the vertical 
 plane JR, and above the plane H, of the springing lines, JR — 
 KR'; and AA" — A', and BB" — B', of the arch. 
 
 2°. Declivity of the plane face of the arch. — PQ, at 18° with 
 JR, is the horizontal trace of the plane of this face. Its bat¬ 
 ter, T \ (3 to 10), is perpendicular to PQ. Hence, assume £L, 
 perpendicular to PQ, revolve it about a vertical axis at 6, to 
 bL", parallel to V, make b'p' — 10, from any convenient scale 
 of equal parts, and p’L,’ = 3, from the same scale ; and L ’b’ will 
 be the revolved position of the line of declivity, 6L, showing 
 the real slope of the plane arch face. 
 
 From this batter we find next, for convenience in projecting 
 points, the slope, taken in vertical planes parallel to the axis, 
 0"0 — Ob Thus LI, parallel to PQ, is the horizontal projec¬ 
 tion of a horizontal line in the plane face of the arch. Note I, 
 its intersection with the vertical plane bb ", revolve I to I", pro¬ 
 ject it to P, on p'h 1 , and Vb r is the vertical projection of IJ, 
 and is the declivity of the plane face of the arch, in the vertical 
 plane bb". 
 
 3°. Horizontal projection of the plane face. — Draw horizon¬ 
 tals, through all the points of the face, as C'Cj through C' and D'; 
 produce them to meet P b\ as at C 2 ; then, for instance, project 
 C 2 at C 3 , and revolve it to C 4 ; then C 4 C, parallel to PQ, will 
 be the horizontal projection of C'C), and will intersect the pro¬ 
 jecting lines, from C' and D', at C and D, the horizontal pro¬ 
 jections of C' and Db Find other points similarly, or — 
 
 Otherwise : project k r at k" and revolve it to k , when kC 
 will coincide with C 4 C, whence, as before, etc. 
 
 Again: as C 4 C 2 is the true distance of C' and D' in front of 
 the vertical plane on PQ, and in the direction of the axis 0"0 
 — O', make iD =j C = CiQj, and we have C and D as before. 
 
 The horizontal projections of the radial joints all meet at O. 
 
 The semi-elliptic face line, AEB, has AB and 20S for a pair 
 of conjugate diameters ; hence it is tangent to A A" and BB" at 
 A and B, and at S has a tangent parallel to AB. 
 
 50. The last of the three constructions of CD, etc., just given, 
 namely, by the method of compass transference of known dis¬ 
 tances is advantageous , in avoiding numerous lines of ■ con¬ 
 struction, as all from C 2 to C; yet for the same reason, disad¬ 
 vantageous , in not preserving upon the paper such traces of the 
 construction as would enable any one to recall it from the 
 drawing alone. 
 
STONE—CUTTING. 
 
 27 
 
 4°. Horizontal projection of the cylindrical face. — J Iv J' is a 
 profile plane, which contains a semicircular right section of the 
 cylindrical gallery. Revolving this plane about a vertical axis 
 at J, the centre of that section will appear as at 0 2 by making 
 KO x equal to the given internal radius of the gallery ; and Kc 2 , 
 with 0 2 as a centre, will be the revolved position of the section. 
 Thence the horizontal projection of any points of the cylindri¬ 
 cal face of the arch can be found as before. 
 
 Thus, produce D'C' to c x , and then either make cC" = c jc 2 , 
 the true distance of C"C r in front of the vertical plane on JR; 
 or, by showing the counter revolution, etc., project c 2 on JR, at 
 c 3 , not shown, counter revolve c 3 to c 4 , not shown, on KJ pro¬ 
 duced, whence project it by a line parallel to JR, till it meets 
 C'C", giving C". In like manner all points of the cylindrical 
 face may be found. 
 
 The radial joints D"E", etc., of this face are arcs of ellipses, 
 being sections of the cylindrical intrados of the gallery by the 
 planes OO'D', etc., which cut it obliquely. 
 
 Opposite joints, symmetrical with OO", as D"E" and d x e x . 
 form parts of one ellipse, D"0"c? 2 , in horizontal projection, 
 since d x e x — d\e\ is exactly over that part of the ellipse D"0° 
 — D'O' whose vertical projection is on D'O' produced. 
 
 All the lines of the cylindrical face are invisible, and hence 
 
 dotted, except such top and lateral edges, as C"D" and C^G". 
 
 * 
 
 II. The directing Instruments. — We may either show to¬ 
 gether the patterns of like faces of all the stones, or the pat¬ 
 terns of all the faces of one stone. 
 
 Adopting the latter method as clearer, while illustrating all 
 the operations required by the former, let the stone C'D'F' be 
 chosen for detailed representation. 
 
 Development of the stone C'D'F'. — A right section of this 
 stone is the polygon C'D'E'F'G', which will develop in a straight 
 line as AjBj, Fig. 31. 
 
 Then, supposing the top face to be the plane of develop¬ 
 ment, and that the faces to the right of D', around to G', are 
 developed to the right of the edge D"D — D', while the face 
 C'G' revolves to the left about the edge C"C — C' into the 
 plane C'D' ; we shall make, in Fig. 31, A 2 <?; cd ; de ; ef ; and 
 /B 2 equal respectively to G'C'; C'D'; D'E' ; E'F', and I 'G' in 
 Fig. 30. At these points draw lines perpendicular to A 2 Bj, 
 
28 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 for the indefinite developments of those edges of the voussoir 
 which are parallel to the axis, 0"0 — O'. 
 
 To develope the edges of the plane end of the stone. — Lay off 
 the perpendicular distances of their extremities from some 
 plane of right section, as JR. Thus = cG ; cCi = <?C, 
 etc., the second term of each equality being taken from the 
 plan in Fig. 30. The curved edge , EF —E'F', is developed 
 by taking one or more intermediate points, as HH', and mak¬ 
 ing g/i, and AH^ Fig. 31, respectively equal to E'H 7 , and HA^ 
 in Fig. 30. Also, for additional accuracy, make d0 2 = D'O', 
 and 020!= 0"0, then O t , Fig. 31, will be a point of pro¬ 
 duced. Likewise, make and o 2 o x , Fig. 31, = G'O', and 
 O n O, Fig. 30, and c, will be a point on GjFj produced. 
 
 To develope the edges of the cylindrical face of the same vous¬ 
 soir. — As before in Figs. 31 and 30, respectively, A x g 2 =z cG" ; 
 cC 2 = cC' r ; Nw = Nw ; H 2 A = H"Aj, etc. Also, as C"G" — 
 C'G' is an arc of the right section of the gallery, C 2 g 2 , Fig. 31, 
 is drawn with a radius = O x K, Fig. 30, and laid off on the 
 perpendicular at the middle of the chord C 2 g 2 . The elliptic arc 
 D"E"0" is developed in its real size at D 2 E 2 0 2 ; and as every 
 edge of the cylindrical face is curved, except C 2 D 2 , they will be 
 curved in the development, and must be there found by inter¬ 
 mediate points, as, at Mm, = Mm, Fig. 30. 
 
 To develope the plane face of the voussoir. — Revolve it about 
 CD — C'D' into the plane of the top. The true lengths of G</, 
 F/, and Eg, Fig. 30, found at k'r, k's, and Jc't, on the line of 
 declivity L 'b', will then be laid off on gG , / X F, and gjE, per¬ 
 pendicular to CjDj, Fig. 31; where g,f x and g x are transferred, 
 as shown, from CD, Fig. 30, to its equal, QD^ Fig. 31. The 
 true size of the radius EO — E'O' is found by revolving it 
 about OO" into the plane H, at e'"0. That of FO — F'O' is, 
 likewise,/"'O ; then arcs from E and F, Fig. 31, as centres, 
 with these radii, respectively, will give 0 3 , the development 
 of the centre of the ellipse of which the face line, EF, is a part, 
 and the point to which GF and D X E radiate. 
 
 To develope the cylindrical face of the voussoir. — Here Fig. 
 32, by, for example, is the true length, taken from g 2 / 2 , Fig. 30, 
 of the circular arc whose vertical projection is Ff. Other 
 points, being similarly found and joined, give the pattern, which 
 must be flexible, of the cylindrical face. When flat, all its 
 edges are curved except CD and GG. The developed faces of 
 
STONE CUTTING. 
 
 29 
 
 the voussoir are the patterns of those faces. Those of the other 
 voussoirs would be similarly found. 
 
 III. Application. — Select a stone whose right section will 
 circumscribe C'D'F'G', and whose length shall not be less than 
 Ee^, and work the top by No. 1, the straight edge (7) and No. 
 3. Make the left side square with the top by No. 2, and finish 
 it by its pattern. No. 4, with the pattern of the bed at D'E', 
 will complete that face. The arch square, No. 5, with the pat¬ 
 tern of the intrados, will give the surface EE^FF" ; and in like 
 manner the whole convex surface can be wrought. All the 
 edges of both ends of the stone being thus given, their patterns, 
 with the straight edge, will serve to complete them. 
 
 Otherwise: the plane and cylindrical ends can be wrought 
 next after the top, by bevels Nos. 6 and 7, respectively. 
 
 This problem includes the following simpler cases, added a? 
 examples. 
 
 Examples. — 1°. Let both ends be plane; one, vertical on PQ ; the other ver¬ 
 tical on JR. 
 
 Ex. 2°. Let the cylindrical end be replaced by a plane one, having JR for its 
 horizontal trace, and a batter of 
 
 Ex. 3°. Construct a rampant (ascending) arch covering a straight flight of 
 steps. 
 
 G-roined, and Cloistered Arches. 
 
 51. Both of these kinds of arches are compound, being 
 formed by the intersection of two single arches, each of which 
 
 Fig. 3. 
 
30 
 
 STEREOTOM Y. 
 
 is usually cylindrical. They are distinguished from each other 
 as follows : — 
 
 In the groined arch , Fig. 3, that part of each cylinder is real 
 which is exterior to the other. Thus EF, LM, eF, and IvH are 
 real portions of elements. 
 
 In the cloistered arch , that part of each cylinder is real which 
 is within the other. Thus in Fig. 3, HF and FM would be the 
 real portions of the elements. 
 
 The groined arch therefore naturally covers the quadrangular 
 space at which two arched open passages, ABC and abc, inter¬ 
 sect ; while the cloistered arch forms the doubly arched cover, 
 or quadrangular dome, of a quadrangular enclosed room, or 
 cell. 
 
 Theorem I. 
 
 ;o. 
 
 Having two cylinders of revolution, whose axes inter sect, the pro¬ 
 jection of their intersection, upon the plane of their axes, is a 
 hyperbola. 
 
 See PI. IV., Fig. 30, where 0 2 0 — O' is the axis of the cyl¬ 
 inder A'S'B', and a parallel to JR through 0 2 , where 0"0 2 = 
 OxK, is the axis of the cylinder all of whose elements are par¬ 
 allel to the one JR. 
 
 A"S"B" is the horizontal projection of the intersection of 
 these cylinders, that is, upon the plane of their axes, and it 
 will be shown to be a hyperbola by proving that (O 2 /a") 2 — 
 ( H"/a") 2 = (0 2 S") 2 ; where H" is any point on A"S"B" and 
 H "h n a perpendicular (ordinate) to the axis 0 2 0. 
 
 Suppose (O 2 /a") 2 — (H"A") 2 = (0 2 S") 2 . (1) 
 
 Now (H'7i' / ) 2 -=(-H'^''')- 2 t==r S / ^' w -X sh lu ; where S'8 = A'B'. 
 And S'/a'" X sh'" = S'/a'" X (S'O' + O'/a'") 
 
 ~=-S -'A'ii-x <S 2 s 2 + H 2 /a 2 ). 
 
 But (S 2 $ 2 ) 2 = (O^) 2 — (O^) 2 . 
 
 And (H 2 /a 2 ) 2 = (O^) 2 — (OA) 2 - 
 Whence, since O x s 2 = 0 2 S", and OJi 2 = O 2 h" 
 
 (S 2 s 2 ) 2 — (H 2 /a 2 ) 2 = (0 2 /a") 2 — (0 2 S") 2 . 
 
 But also (S 2 s 2 ) 2 — (H 2 /a 2 ) 2 = (O'H') 2 — (0'A'") 2 = (H'A"')‘ 
 = (H"/a") 2 . 
 
 Hence (0 2 /a") 2 — (0 2 S") 2 = (H"/a") 2 . 
 
 Or, (0 2 /a") 2 — (H"/a") 2 = (0 2 S") 2 . 
 
 Thus equation (1) is proved; and, calling 0 2 h n = x; and 
 
 sJ " 1 
 
 -Pi ^ 
 
 —v 
 
 
 __ --TL, 
 
 = - wu. 
 
 ‘H-O'Cz 
 
 / 
 
 A* 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 31 
 
 H "h n =. y ; and 0 2 S" = a ; we have x 2 — y 2 — a 2 ; which is 
 the equation of an equilateral hyperbola , that is, one whose 
 axes are equal. Thus the theorem is proved. 
 
 O *">—t-r— £ Cl * j 
 
 52. An important consequence of the last theorem is, that 
 when the cylinders become equal, the vertices of the curve, of 
 which S" is one, unite at 0 2 . Now when the two vertices of a 
 hyperbola coincide, the curve reduces to the special case of two 
 intersecting straight lines. 
 
 But the actual intersections of two cylinders (whose axes are 
 not parallel) are curves. Hence if any projection of these 
 curves is straight , they are plane curves , and hence ellipses. 
 
 53. A little consideration of the properties of hyperbolas 
 
 will sufficiently show, what there is not room here to strictly 
 prove: ls£, that a change in the angle between the axes of the 
 cylinders would only cause the curve to become a hy¬ 
 
 perbola referred to the new axes as conjugate diameters; 
 and 2c?, that the substitution of elliptic for circular cylinders 
 would only yield a general , in place of the equilateral form of 
 the hyperbola. The conclusion of (52) is therefore true of all 
 cylinders whose diameters, measured in a plane perpendicular 
 to that of their axes, are equal. 
 
 54. Cylinders, situated as just described, will have a pair 
 of common tangent planes parallel to that of their axes. This 
 fact, added to the last two articles, affords several statements of 
 what is really the same proposition, each statement being ap¬ 
 propriate to certain given conditions. Thus — 
 
 1°. If two ellipses intersect in a common semi-axis, of the 
 same kind for each, their other axes being in the same plane P 
 (thus if two ellipses whose transverse axes bisect each other 
 in H have a common vertical semi-conjugate axis), lines join¬ 
 ing points, which are on the two ellipses, and which are at 
 equal distances from P, will be parallel, and will therefore form 
 a pair of cylinders, of which these ellipses will be the intersec¬ 
 tions. 
 
 2°. If two cylinders intersect in one plane curve, as an 
 ellipse, there will be a second branch of the intersection, which 
 will also be plane. 
 
 3 C . If two cylinders whose axes are in the same plane P, 
 also have two common tangent planes, parallel to P, they will 
 intersect in two plane curves, which will cross each other at 
 
 
32 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 the intersections of the elements of contact of the tangent 
 planes. 
 
 Problem VI. 
 
 The oblique groined arch. 
 
 55. Design. — Suppose that, in the collecting system of cer¬ 
 tain water-works, supplied by several ponds, two conduits, each 
 covered by semi-cylindrical arches of nine feet span, unite at 
 an angle of 67° : 30' and discharge into one of twelve feet span, 
 covered by a semi-elliptic arch, having the same rise and spring¬ 
 ing plane as the former ones. 
 
 56. We may note in passing that, supposing the water to be 
 four feet deep in each of the nine-foot conduits, the sum of 
 their water sections is 72 square feet. Then, in the large con¬ 
 duit, if the water be but four feet deep, this conduit should be 
 18 feet wide. Or, if but 12 feet wide, as in the problem, its 
 floor should be sunk so that the water in it should be six feet 
 deep ; or else its declivity should be increased to give such a 
 velocity to the water in it that its section of 48 square feet 
 would transmit as much water per minute as passes the sec¬ 
 tions of 36 square feet each, of the two nine-foot conduits. 
 
 I. The Projections. — Three planes of projection are used: 
 the horizontal plane, Hi containing the springing lines, H/ and 
 YN, YM and Y"M", of the two smaller conduits, and HHh and 
 H"H£, of the larger one ; a vertical plane Vi whose ground line 
 is P'Q', and which is perpendicular to the axis OX — X' of one 
 of the smaller conduits ; and a vertical plane V» whose ground 
 line is Il'ilT, and which is perpendicular to the axis O m — 0[ 
 of the larger conduit. 
 
 The lines in the horizontal plane can be first laid down from 
 the given dimensions and axes, OX and Ora, of the arches; 
 giving the four springing points H, Y, Y", H", of the groin. 
 Then OY and OY" are the horizontal projections of the quar¬ 
 ter ellipses (52), in which the arch whose axis is OR inter¬ 
 sects the right hand half of the one whose axis is OX. Like¬ 
 wise OH and OH" are the projections of the intersections of 
 the arch whose axis is Ora with the left hand half of the one 
 whose axis is OX. 
 
 Next make the elevation on P'Q( making the spandril stones 
 40" thick, the thickness 0'I' at the crown 3 ft., and the radius, ' 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 33 
 
 -f 
 
 q'V, of the extrados, 9 ft. The radial joints from X' divide the 
 intrados into five equal parts. 
 
 The elevation on is now made as follows: — 
 
 1°. The face line Hj O" IT. — Any point, as a', is the ver¬ 
 tical projection of the element A" A a, or of any point of it. 
 Hence a 1 is horizontally projected upon the groin curves at A 
 and A". The projections of these points on Vi will then be 
 at a[ and a", at heights above HjH^ equal to that of a' above 
 
 PQ. 
 
 2°. Other points of the elevation on Vi* — As the extrados 
 is seldom a finished surface, we need not construct the groin 
 curves of the extrados, but may proceed as follows, to find ex¬ 
 tremities of radial joint lines ; these joints being normal to the 
 intrados in both elevations. 
 
 To find f\ for example. Draw the tangent g'V perpendic¬ 
 ular to Xy, project V at l in the vertical plane OH of the groin, 
 when Gl will be the horizontal projection of g'V, considered as 
 the tangent to the groin HO at G g’. Then projecting G at 
 g\ and l at l[, gives g[l[ as the new vertical projection of this 
 tangent, and mg\, perpendicular to it, as the like projection of 
 the joint in the face of the main arch, corresponding to X!g' on 
 that of the arch H'O'Yh Finally f[ is the intersection of the 
 joint mgi with e[f [ parallel to the ground line HiH^, and at a 
 height from it elF" — e'P'. 
 
 In like manner, other points may be found, as may be seen 
 at/i, extremity of an auxiliary joint X!j' — ni 1 j[. 
 
 8°. The curve b"I'"c[, right section of the extrados of the 
 elliptic arch is not, as might be supposed, an ellipse, derived 
 from b'j' as 0"Hj was from OH; since the two conditions of 
 normal joints, and equal heights of like joints on both eleva¬ 
 tions prevent this. 
 
 That is, i [, for example, determined from V by projecting 
 i’ upon DO as the straight horizontal projection of the outer 
 groin, and thence to i[, as g\ was found from g’ would not co¬ 
 incide with i[ of the figure, found on the given normal mg x and 
 at the same height as i’ ; since each determination is complete 
 in itself and hence independent of the other. 
 
 Points, as B, C, etc., of the horizontal projection of the outer 
 groin, are at the intersection of projecting lines from b' and b [; 
 o’ and c[, etc. ; and are not in a straight line with O; thus 
 showing that the outer groin is not, in space, a plane curve. 
 
 3 
 
84 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 4°. The Projections of a Stone. —The stones of a groined 
 arch in jointed masonry are partly in each arch. Hence, tak¬ 
 ing the most irregular stone as an example, it is that whose sec¬ 
 tion in the front elevation is a'h'c'd'ef'g'. The side elevation 
 of the end in the elliptic arch is a' x b' x d' x e\g' x , and its plan is lim¬ 
 ited by the figure AadT)d x a x . 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments. — Passing by Nos. 1 and 2, 
 the straight-edge and square, which are of constant use (7), 
 there are the following : — 
 
 No. 3, = the pattern a'b'd'.... g' ot the end in the vertical 
 plane at ad. 
 
 No. 4, = the pattern, dcCc x d x , of the plane portion of the top. 
 
 No. 5 = the pattern ¥fdd x f x of the plane portion of the 
 under side. 
 
 Fig. 34 shows, together, the patterns, Nos. 6, 7, 8, and 9, of 
 the principal lateral faces within the circular arch. There, 
 ab = a'b'; be — the arc b'd ; ag — the arc a’g' ; oi\dfg =f'g'. 
 
 Also C <?, BJ, A a . ¥f = C <?, B5.etc., in the plan, 
 
 Fig. 33. Thus No. 6 is the pattern of the plane radial bed 
 ABa5 — a'b'; No. 7, of the cylindrical extrados BC5c— b’d ; 
 No. 8, of the cylindrical intrados, AG ag — a’g' ; and No. 9, of 
 the plane radial bed, F Gfg — f'g’> 
 
 Detailed description of the analogous patterns, Nos. 10, 11, 
 12, and 13, Fig. 35, of the corresponding lateral faces of that 
 part of the stone lying in the elliptic arch, is unnecessary, as 
 the construction of Fig. 35 is entirely similar to that of Fig. 34. 
 
 Thus, a x p x , Fig. 35 = a x p x from the elliptical elevation; 
 and A a x Pp x , etc., Fig. 35, = Aa x P p x , etc., from the plan ; 
 hence AGa^ is the pattern of the soffit AGa^ — a\g x . 
 
 As a further aid to accuracy, there should be one or more 
 right section bevels, as Nos. 14 and 15, to test the relative po¬ 
 sition of the lateral faces. No. 16 is the pattern of the end in 
 the plane a x d x . 
 
 III. Application. — Choosing a block of the thickness hk y 
 and in the plan of which A add x a x can be inscribed, first work 
 the end in the plane ad , and complete it by the pattern No. 3. 
 From this, by means of No. 2, the square, determine the direc¬ 
 tion of all the lateral faces, including the upper and under 
 ones; and the back, whose horizontal projection is Dcf and 
 Dc? x ; and finish them by their patterns, Nos. 4-9, and the arch¬ 
 square, No. 14. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 35 
 
 This done, the three edges, c x d x , f x d x , and d x —e x d[ of the end 
 in the plane a x d x will be known, whence this end can be wrought 
 square with the top and bottom plane surfaces, and completed 
 by its pattern, No. 16. Thence the remaining lateral surfaces 
 within the elliptic arch can be directed by the square, and com¬ 
 pleted by their patterns, Nos. 10-13, and No. 15. 
 
 Examples.—1°. Let the cylinders (having a common springing plane, and 
 equal heights in every case) be equal. 
 
 Ex. 2°. Let them be at right angles. 
 
 Ex. 3°. Construct the patterns for the key-stone (which will extend in one 
 piece from O, on all the cylinders). 
 
 Ex. 4°. The arches being at right angles, let the circular cylinder be real be¬ 
 tween OH and OH", and the elliptic one, between OH and OT, forming a clois¬ 
 tered arch. 
 
 Ex. 5°. In Ex. 4°, construct the patterns for the groin stone corresponding to 
 the one described in the groined arch (A a will be real from A forward, and A a, 
 will be real from A to the right). 
 
 Ex. 6°. In Exs. 2° and 4®, let the extrados be finished as in PI. IV., Fig. 30. , 
 
 Problem VII. 
 
 The groined and cloistered, or elbow arch. 
 
 57. This problem is designed to illustrate very compactly, 
 that is, without repetition of similar parts, first , the difference 
 between a groined and a cloistered arch ; and, second , the mode 
 of proceeding when it is determined that the intersection of the 
 two extrados, that is, the outer , as well as the inner groin curve, 
 shall be a vertical ellipse. 
 
 I. The Projections. — A gallery, PI. VI., Fig. 47, whose width 
 A'B' is 8 ft., intersects one of 10 ft. in width, each of them end¬ 
 ing at its intersection, ADB, with the other. These galleries 
 are covered by arches of equal rise, C'D' = C^D'', and whose 
 axes, C'D and C"D, are in the same plane. They therefore in¬ 
 tersect in a vertical ellipse (52), whose horizontal projection 
 is ADB. The radius, E'Cj, of the given extrados is 5 r : 3'h 
 
 The portion A'C'DC^A'' thus forms one quarter of a right- 
 angled groined arch ; while B'C'DC^B" forms one quarter of 
 a right-angled cloistered arch. The construction will mostly 
 be obvious on inspection, by comparison with PI. IV., Fig. 33. 
 
 A stone of the cloister. — MPRr—M'P' is its circular intrados; 
 OPRQ—O'P' is a radial joint; NOQg — N'O'is its circular 
 extrados; MNjr—M'N' is another radial joint, and MO — 
 
36 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 M'N'O'P' is its vertical plane end. The like surfaces in the 
 elliptic portion are obvious by reading the drawing. 
 
 The proposed elliptical outer groin may coincide with the 
 inner one AB, in plan. That is, both may be in the same 
 vertical plane. Then, taking the joint at a'd for illustration, 
 c' will be horizontally projected at n instead of at c ; and n will 
 thence be projected at n", at the same height as c' ; likewise 
 F, at/, on BA produced, and at/" ; and so on for other points. 
 Then E "n"f" will be an ellipse, it being the right section of 
 the cylinder whose oblique section is the vertical ellipse Dm/. 
 Producing the normal joint a"c" to the new extrados E"n"/", 
 we find its new outer extremity o" ; and the other vertical pro¬ 
 jection, o'o'", at the same height as o", of the element of the 
 new extrados, containing o". But o’"o' must be limited by the 
 plane, CV, of the joint a!d, as at o’, whose horizontal projection 
 is o, on the horizontal projection, os, of the element at o". 
 
 Considering then the stone below the joint a'c', a"c", its 
 radial surfaces are si"ao ; oan, where on — o'd — o"n" is an 
 elliptic arc ; and ui'an. 
 
 This design is more complex than the usual one, but gives a 
 greater increase of radial thickness toward the springing of the 
 elliptic arch. Indeed, unless the radius CjE' exceeds a certain 
 limit, relative to C'D' and D'E', the joint, or normal e"F" will 
 be less than D"E", which is quite undesirable, relative to sta¬ 
 bility. The joints of the intrados, being the most important, 
 are inked full; that is, as if seen from below ; as it is often 
 convenient to do (8). 
 
 The outer groin may be elliptical, found, like the inner one, 
 from given extrados, if the consequent deviation of the de¬ 
 rived face joints from a normal direction be only very slight. 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments. — These can be constructed 
 as in the last problem. 
 
 III. Application. — See also the last problem. 
 
 Examples. — 1°. Let both arches he circular. 
 
 2°. Let both be elliptical. 
 
 3°. Let their axes intersect at any other than a right angle. 
 
 4°. Turn the figure right for left, and ink the plan as seen from above. 
 
 5°. Construct the patterns for the key-stone of the groin; and of any other 
 stone, both in the groined and in the cloistered angle. 
 
 6°. ylssume an elliptic extrados of suitable proportions on the elliptic arch, and 
 find the corresponding curve joining the corresponding extremities of the normal 
 joints of the circular arch. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 37 
 
 Conical or Trumpet Arches. 
 
 58. When two walls, whether having vertical or slopmg 
 faces, meet, so as to enclose any angle, it is sometimes desira¬ 
 ble to connect them at or near the top by self-supporting 
 masonry, which may, for example, afford additional area for 
 standing or passage. The original ground room enclosed by 
 the supposed angle at which the walls meet is not encroached 
 upon by the arched connection of the walls, since the latter is 
 self-supporting from the walls. 
 
 Such arch work, projecting from one or more wall faces, or 
 piercing them, and generally with a conical intrados, has been 
 called a trumpet. 
 
 Problem VIII. 
 
 A trumpet in the angle between two retaining walls. 
 
 I. The Projections. — 1°. Description. Let AC and BC, PI. 
 V., Fig. 36, be the horizontal traces of two walls, enclosing a 
 right angle ; and whose faces, C AdF, and CBeF, have the same 
 slope or batter of 2 to 5. 
 
 Let FDE be the level top of a quadrantal platform, with a 
 radius of : 10" ; and forming a quarter of the base of an in¬ 
 verted oblique cone, whose axis coincides with FC — J?'C', the 
 line of intersection of the faces of the walls ; and a portion of 
 whose convex surface forms the front face, ADEBJ — A'D'E' 
 B'J', partly broken away on the right, of the platform. 
 
 This platform is then supported by a trumpet, whose sur¬ 
 face, AJBC — A'J'B'C', is a segment of a cone of revolution 
 whose axis HC — C ' is perpendicular to the plane V, and in 
 the plane H. From this general description, we proceed to 
 the details of the construction. 
 
 2°. Outlines of the walls and platform. — Having laid down 
 the traces, AC and BC, of the walls, CC', the horizontal pro¬ 
 jection of their intersection will bisect ACB, because the walls 
 have the same slope. Next draw Cm, and on it lay off from 
 C, five from any scale of equal parts ; and lx, parallel to BC = 
 two from the same scale ; then, by the given conditions, Cx 
 will be the section of the face of the wall AdC', made by the 
 vertical plane, on BC, and revolved about the trace BC, into 
 
SB 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 H. Now lay off C f= the height of the platform, and Cm , that 
 of the wall, draw /F" and wM', parallel to lx, project M' at 
 (7, and F" at F, on CC', and draw C'd and C'e for the hori¬ 
 zontal projections of the upper edges of the walls, and FD and 
 FE, respectively parallel to them, and of the given dimensions 
 for the intersections of the platform with the faces of the walls. 
 
 3°. Conical front of the platform, and its vertex. — Sup¬ 
 posing it required for good appearance that the conical front 
 face of the platform shall intersect the walls in their lines 
 of declivity, draw DA and EB, perpendicular to AC and BC, 
 as such intersections ; then AKB, with C as its centre, will be 
 the horizontal trace of this conical front: and as DA and EB 
 are two of its elements, their intersection, V, will be the hori¬ 
 zontal projection of its vertex. 
 
 The projections of YD and YE on the vertical plane BCM, 
 are BCM and B ; which after revolution, as in (2°) will appear 
 at M'C and EB produced, which meet at the point indicated as 
 V". Then, making C'V' = BY", we have V r the vertical pro¬ 
 jection of the vertex of the conical front of the platform. 
 
 4°. Outlines and joints of the trumpet. — Let the vertical 
 semicircle, AHB — A'H'B', on the chord, AB, of the horizon¬ 
 tal trace of the inverted cone, be the directrix of the cone of 
 revolution forming the trumpet. Dividing A'H'B' conveniently 
 into equal parts, here three, project i! and f, the points of di¬ 
 vision, at i and j, giving C i — C’i', etc., as elements, and joints, 
 of the trumpet. 
 
 To find the face line of the trumpet, find where its elements 
 meet the surface of the cone VV'. Since the vertex CC' of the 
 trumpet cone is in the axis, YC —Y'C', of the other one, this 
 is easily done by assuming any element, as C i — C'i 1 , of the 
 trumpet and finding its trace, and that of the axis, YF — Y ; F\ 
 upon the plane D'E' of the upper base of the platform. These 
 traces are N'N and F'F, giving FN as the trace of the plane of 
 these lines upon the top of the platform. FN cuts the circum¬ 
 ference, EID, of the platform at aa', giving aV — a'V' for the 
 element of the cone YV' in the same plane with C i — Ci', and 
 hence intersecting the latter at bb', a point of the required 
 face line. 
 
 The highest point. — This, JJ', is found by revolving the ele¬ 
 ments VI and CH of the two cones, and in their common ver¬ 
 tical meridian plane YC, about any convenient vertical axis, as 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 39 
 
 the vertical trace, C'F', of that plane, till they fall in, or par¬ 
 allel to the plane V- Each point revolved moves in a hori¬ 
 zontal arc, at its proper height, as can be read from the figure, 
 giving V'"K"I" and C // H' / as the respective revolved elements. 
 These intersect at J' r ; which, by counter revolution, gives JJ', 
 the required highest point. 
 
 To give a neater design to the top of the platform, the planes 
 of the joints of the trumpet radiate from the axis of the cone 
 VV', giving the radial lines as a C for the joints of the platform. 
 But to prevent the stones from coming to an edge along that 
 axis, they abut against a conical faced stone whose upper base 
 is gkh, of any convenient assumed radius, and whose intersec¬ 
 tion ucv — u'c'v* with the trumpet cone may be found as 
 A6B — A'6'J 7 was. 
 
 This stone may be built into the walls, as along the planes 
 Q gu and Jiv P, to any extent desired for stability. Also the 
 side stones, as A'D 'a'b', of the trumpet may be likewise built 
 into the wall to avoid a thin edge along AC — A'C'. The 
 small component of the reactions of the side stones tending to 
 thrust the central one forward would be sufficiently resisted by 
 the adhesion of the cement. Otherwise: the intermediate 
 stones, one or more, could easily be supported by forming the 
 stone ghuv , as indicated in Fig. 37, with a conical step as s. 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments. — These, taking the central 
 stone for illustration, will consist of patterns of its four lateral 
 faces, with a few bevels. 
 
 After Nos. 1 and 2, there will be No. 3, the pattern, aJcnp, 
 of the top, No. 4, that of the two equal radial beds, and No. 5, 
 that of the conical intrados ; which are constructed as follows : 
 No. 4 shows the full size, and real form of the radial bed npqr , 
 which is supposed to be revolved about its horizontal upper 
 edge np , till horizontal; when r, its lowest point, will be found 
 at a distance Fig. 42, from np , equal to the hypothenuse 
 of a right angled triangle, of which rs, perpendicular to np , and 
 the vertical distance of r' below n'p', are the other sides. Also, 
 92 1 s 1 = ns. Finding t x q y in like manner, we have the pattern 
 No. 4, which will serve for both of the radial beds of this 
 stone. 
 
 No. 5 is the development of the conical intrados, made by 
 describing the arc i r ji = i'j', and with the radius C^H 7 ', = the 
 slant height to the circular directrix AB — A'H'B', and laying 
 
40 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 off the true lengths of the elements as C^i = C "V" = the true 
 length of C b — C'b' revolved first at Ob" into the vertical plane 
 CC'F' and thence to O'b"'. 
 
 Bevels, Nos. 6 and 7, set to the angles s^q i and sin^, and 
 held in the plane CC'F', will be useful in giving the positions 
 of the two ends. The latter surfaces, being parts of oblique 
 cones, can be developed only by the usual construction, in which 
 the intersection of such a cone with a sphere whose centre is 
 the vertex (W') of the cone is found ; the development of 
 such intersection being a circle. But these developments are 
 unnecessary. 
 
 Let rs now be considered as the horizontal trace of a vertical 
 plane, perpendicular to the edge np, and cutting the adjacent 
 radial bed in sr, and the top in a line also horizontally pro¬ 
 jected in sr. By revolving the former sr about the latter till 
 horizontal, the true size of the diedral angle between the top, 
 and the radial bed npr, will be found. A bevel, No. 8, set to 
 this angle will be useful. 
 
 III. Application. — Having chosen a suitable block, in which 
 the finished stone could be inscribed, first form the top, by No. 
 1, and by its pattern No. 3 ; next, the radial beds, directing 
 their position by No. 8, and their form by No. 4 ; next the con¬ 
 ical intrados, of which No. 5 is the pattern. All the edges of 
 the two ends will thus be known, and as their radial edges are 
 elements of the cones to which they belong, it is only necessary 
 to transfer to ap and bq , from the drawings, points where ele¬ 
 ments meet those lines, and bring the front end apbq to its 
 proper conical form by cutting away the stone till No. 1 will 
 apply to it, at the corresponding points of division of ap and 
 bg. Hence it is, that, as already said, the tediously found de¬ 
 velopments of these conical ends may be dispensed with. 
 
 Problem IX. 
 
 A trumpet arched door on a corner. 
 
 I. The Projections. 1°. Outlines of the Plan. — PI. V., 
 Fig. 40. The projections are here arranged partly with a view 
 to the greatest compactness. Two walls of an enclosed space, 
 and of the thickness, AC = BD = 4' : 9", meet at right angles. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 41 
 
 From a, the equal distances aA and aB, each = 8' : 6" are set 
 off as the external limits of the trumpet as seen in plan. 
 
 If CD, the width of the door were also given, it would deter¬ 
 mine the angle A/B at the vertex / of the conical surface of 
 the trumpet. We here suppose A/B = 90°, which, with the 
 previous data, makes CD = 5 r : 3%" very nearly. A vertical 
 semicircle, A&B, which, revolved about AB till horizontal, gives 
 AEFB, is taken as the base, or linear directrix of the trumpet. 
 Then CcD is a vertical semicircular section of the trumpet, and 
 also of a second conical zone CEFD whose vertex is c, and 
 which serves to widen the approach, EFH, to the door. To 
 avoid crowding the figure, CD is shown as a single line, which 
 it might, in fact, be, in case of an opening having no gate, or 
 of a thin iron gate ; but in case of a gate of considerable thick¬ 
 ness, the edge at QdD should be cut away giving a narrow cyl¬ 
 indrical band, fitted to the gate top ; or there should be a gate 
 recess as in PI. VI., Fig. 45. 
 
 2°. The Elevation in general, and plans of the elements. — 
 The foregoing being the main features as seen in plan, the ele¬ 
 vations are shown on two vertical planes ; one having aB, and 
 the other, A^B" for its ground line. Of these, only the former 
 is necessary for the purposes of the mason, showing as it does 
 the true sizes of the lines in the external face of one of the 
 walls; while the other, on the vertical plane at A^B" is only 
 useful as helping to give an idea of the structure, as seen in 
 looking directly through the doorway, in the direction af. 
 
 The vertical planes A a and B a, being parallel to the respec¬ 
 tive opposite elements, B/ and Af, cut the trumpet cone ABf 
 in equal parabolas ; hence, to avoid a too great inequality in 
 the sizes of the arch stones as seen in the exterior of the walls, 
 divide the semicircle A/B, or its equal A n b"F", into conven¬ 
 ient unequal parts, the largest, B "l" = BZ' being laid off from 
 the springing at B" of the arch. Project V, or V ; h', or h" ; 
 etc., at l, h, etc., and through l, h, etc., draw flk, fg, etc., hori¬ 
 zontal projections of elements of the trumpet. These at n, i, 
 etc., pass to the conical zone CEFD, as at nm, and thence to 
 the cylindrical band EGHF in parallel elements, as mo. 
 
 3°. To find the parabola, A a, in its own plane. 
 
 1st. Without the elevation on A^B''. — The trumpet, being 
 a cone of revolution, and its axis af horizontal, its elements fa, 
 f9> etc., revolved about its axis, fx, and towards B, will come 
 
42 
 
 STEREOTOM Y. 
 
 to coincide with the extreme element /B produced, as at fa u 
 fg v , etc.; where aa x , gg x , etc., perpendicular to fx, are the hor¬ 
 izontal projections of the arcs described by a, g, etc. Then a’, 
 g', etc., vertical projections of a, g, etc., extremities of elements 
 of the trumpet, are at the intersections of the perpendiculars 
 aa', gg', etc., to the ground line aB, with the arcs a x a', gig', etc., 
 all having x for their centre, and which being in the vertical 
 plane on aB, are seen in their true size. (The arc k x k', being 
 confused with B k', is not shown.) 
 
 2c?. With the use of the elevation on A^B". — Having h", for 
 example, vertical projection of h, draw f"h", the vertical pro¬ 
 jection of the element fh, and project g upon it, at g". Then 
 g' is at a height gg', equal to that of g" above A^B" ; and in 
 like manner other points of Ba', except a', can be found. As 
 before, aa' = aa x . 
 
 4°. Determination of the radial beds. — These, if the face 
 joints, as g'V, were made normal to the parabolas, of which 
 B a' is one, would be determined by these joints, with the ele¬ 
 ment joints fg, etc., and hence could not also contain the axis 
 fx of the trumpet, since g'V, etc., if normal to Ba', do not in¬ 
 tersect that axis. But if these radial beds do not contain the 
 axis fx, which is also the axis of the cone cEF, and of the cyl¬ 
 inder EGHF, their planes cannot cut the two latter surfaces in 
 elements, and the stones of the trumpet would properly termi¬ 
 nate in a vertical plane on CD, and be succeeded by others, 
 radiating from the axis fcx, and covering the surfaces named 
 between CD and GH. 
 
 We therefore choose beds radiating from the common axis 
 fcx and extending from A a and Ba to LH. The top edges of 
 these beds, in the horizontal surfaces as VK' — I"K" will then 
 be parallel to fx; and the face joints g'V — g"V, etc., will 
 radiate from the point x,f" in the plane Ba. 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments. — These, besides Nos. 1 and 
 2, (7) will consist of patterns of the surfaces of the stones, 
 with such other bevels besides No. 2, as may be considered use¬ 
 ful as checks. 
 
 Taking the stone gkinmor — g'VK'J'k '— I"K"J"n"i"r"m", 
 No. 3, the pattern of its back, is I"K"J"r"w", which is in the 
 vertical plane LH. 
 
 No. 4, is the pattern of its front, VK'J'k'g'. 
 
 Nos. 5 and 6, are the patterns of the radial beds on f" J", 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 43 
 
 and on/"! 7 '. These are both shown as revolved about the axis 
 fx of the trumpet, till they become horizontal. Thus HI 2 = 
 I "r" ; g 1 J 1 = g'V ; Dgi shows the true length of ig — i"g" ; etc. 
 
 No.. 7, the pattern of the top, is a trapezoid of altitude F'K" 
 and bases equal to J ie T 2 and I 1 I 2 . 
 
 No. 8, is a pattern of the conical intrados, gink, found, if 
 flexible, as in previous similar constructions by developing the 
 cone whose vertex is /. But as it is only the elements of the 
 intrados that must be found, it is enough to develop the pyra¬ 
 mid whose edges coincide with these elements. Hence in Fig. 
 41, the chords B£ and Ih are equal to the chords B "1" and V'h", 
 Fig. 40 and nikg is the pattern required. 
 
 Flexible patterns 9 and 10 of inm, and srom can obviously 
 be found. The vertical surface on K'J', forming No. 11, is 
 simply a rectangle, = K'J 7 X JiJ 2 . 
 
 Nos, 12,13, and 14, will be bevels set to the respective angles 
 Iv "I"g", between the top and a radial bed; K"J"k" ; and HFD, 
 between a vertical side as J'K' and the front, and taken in a 
 horizontal plane. 
 
 Fig. 44, is an oblique projection of the stone just described, 
 made intelligible by means of the like letters at like points. 
 
 III. The Application. —First, work the back by No. 1, and 
 mark its form by No. 3. Second, all the lateral faces adjacent 
 to the back are made square with it by No. 2. Also, the top 
 and the vertical side on J'K' are at right angles. Third, the 
 forms of the faces just mentioned can then be marked by their 
 patterns (5-7), 10, and 11 ; and the bevels, 12 and 13, can be 
 used as checks on their position. Fourth, make the front 
 square with the top, or at the angle HFD with the vertical side, 
 holding No. 14 perpendicular to the edge J'K'. 
 
 Fifth, mark the elements, gi and nk by No. 9, whence inm 
 can be wrought by No. 1, placed upon corresponding points of 
 division of in and ms into equal parts. 
 
 The upper joints of the trumpet stones being parallel to fx, 
 there will be some three-cornered stones adjacent to them in 
 the wall, where the joints are parallel to AC and BD. 
 
 Examples. — 1°. Let the walls include any other than a right angle. 
 
 2°. Let their exterior be a vertical tangent cylinder from A to B. 
 
 3°. Let the cone be other than right angled at its vertex f. 
 
 4°. Let FH be increased till LLj shall be long enough to embrace the back ends 
 of all the trumpet stones. 
 
44 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 5°. Let LLi be ;i sloping wall. 
 
 6°. Let there be a batter to the exterior faces A a and Br/, of the wall. 
 
 7°. Let there be no opening at CD, and describe with an oblique or isometric 
 projection, the stone GECDFH —f necessary to fill the opening, and admit the 
 extension of the trumpet surface to its vertex f 
 
 PROBLEM X. 
 
 An arched oblique descent. 
 
 I. The Projections. —Various conditions may give occasion 
 for a structure of this kind. Thus it might lead from a side 
 walk to an underground railway ; or from a hydraulic canal to 
 a turbine wheel pit; or it might cover an arched stairway lead¬ 
 ing to an arched gallery. 
 
 1°. The perpendicular projections. —ABCD, PI. V, Fig. 43, is 
 the horizontal projection of the section in the springing plane. 
 A vertical plane on AC here makes an angle of 28° with a ver¬ 
 tical plane on A x A perpendicular to AB. The line CD — D' 
 is one springing line of the intrados of a semi-cylindrical gallery, 
 of radius MD = 11' : 6" ; the perpendicular length, AA,, 
 of the horizontal projection is 7 ft.; and AB and EF are re¬ 
 spectively 15 ft. and 9 ft. 
 
 Two principal vertical planes of projection are used ; V, that 
 of the head, on AB, and one Vi whose ground line is BD. The 
 line AB is at a height, BB X , = 3' : 3 " above CD, and hence, 
 strictly, the diameter AB of the vertical projection, APB, of the 
 head should be a line A'B' (not shown) parallel to AB and 
 3': 3" above it. But to condense the figure, and because this 
 position of APB is not essential, the vertical plane, V, of the 
 head is revolved about its trace on the springing plane B X DC, 
 instead of about its horizontal trace. 
 
 2°. The oblique projections. —The projection of the arch 
 upon the vertical plane, Vn on BD, might be made in the usual 
 way, by projecting lines perpendicular to that plane. But, as 
 may be seen by trial, the result would be a much more com¬ 
 plicated, but no more useful figure than the present projection 
 on BD ; which is an oblique projection, formed by projecting 
 lines parallel to AB. 
 
 Thus, since the plane V is vertical, B j" perpendicular to BD, 
 is its trace on the vertical plane Vi, and is also the oblique pro¬ 
 jection of the head, on Vi« Likewise, the quadrant DV, being 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 4f> 
 
 the revolved semi-right section of the gallery reached by the 
 descent, MJ) is the oblique projection of its horizontal radius, 
 MD, and similarly S, T, etc., are obliquely projected on Vi at 
 Si, T 1? etc. Then making = Ss ; = T£, etc., is 
 
 an arc of the section of the gallery by the plane Vn and D/ 2 , 
 where j"j a is parallel to I^D, is the oblique projection of the 
 cylindrical face of the descent. That is, B lt /"/ 2 D is the oblique 
 projection of the outlines of the descent. 
 
 Laying off the heights of the several points of the semicir¬ 
 cular face above AB, from B x on B x j", and drawing lines par¬ 
 allel to BJD and limited by D/ 2 , through the points so found, 
 we find the elements and edges parallel to them, of the descend¬ 
 ing arch. Thus, B^" = BB' by drawing Wb parallel to BBj 
 and the arc bb" with centre Bi; then b u i% is parallel to B t D, and 
 all the other parallels to B X D are similarly found, as may be 
 seen by the figure. 
 
 3°. The right section. — This is in any plane perpendicular 
 to the elements of the arch. To condense the figure (though 
 at the expense of confusing it somewhat, having first sought to 
 make it on the largest scale possible), assume XY, perpendicu¬ 
 lar to BD, and XIj, perpendicular to B^, as the traces of such 
 a plane. Then as usual, choose auxiliary planes parallel to 
 the axis of the cylinder; here, vertical planes, parallel to Vi- 
 Each of these will contain an element of the arch ; and a line 
 of the plane YXIj, whose horizontal trace will be on XY and 
 whose vertical projection will be parallel to XIj. Thus the 
 plane PPI", cuts from the arch the element at P"— P I", and 
 from the cutting plane YXI t the line whose horizontal trace is 
 p" (intersection of the horizontal traces XY, and P p"') and 
 whose vertical projection is pp’, parallel to X^ through p the 
 projection of p" on XD. Having found, as above, b"i 2 also p’q ', 
 by making B,*/ = B^ = BQ = PP', as shown ; p r , and i\ the 
 intersections of pp ' with q’p' and b"i 2 are two points of the ob¬ 
 lique projection of the right section. Then making p" P" = pp' 
 and p"l" = pi 1 , as shown by revolving p' and i l to p x and I 2 , 
 about p as a centre, and projecting p x , and I 2 by the lines pj?" 
 and I 2 P' to P" and I" on PP", we have the position of the points 
 p' and i' when revolved about XY into the horizontal plane. 
 
 All other points, both of the oblique projection and the re¬ 
 volved position of the right section, are similarly found, as is 
 sufficiently indicated by the lettering of other points. 
 
46 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 Making Xe — XeJ, and drawing eY to Y, the intersection of 
 XY with DC, the horizontal trace of the springing plane ; eY 
 is the revolved position of the intersection of the plane, YXI, 
 of right section, with the springing plane B X DY. 
 
 4°. Special Constructions. — Ye is made to pass through F, 
 in order to compare FO'E and FO"'E more nearly, though this 
 is not necessary. Ye is thus placed by first assuming YX^ at 
 pleasure, and finding the corresponding position of eY ; when, 
 if this position does not contain F, draw a parallel to it that 
 will, viz., eY as on the figure, which will meet DC at that posi 
 tion of Y whence the corresponding desired position of YX can 
 be drawn. 
 
 The tangent to FO m E, parallel to AB. Considering AB for 
 a moment as a line in the revolved plane of right section and 
 parallel to such a tangent, its horizontal trace would be y ; and 
 its vertical trace B 2 would be found by making XB 2 = XB. 
 Then making the height B5 3 = B 2 b 2 , we get b 3 y, its projection 
 on V, and the parallel tangent at K7 gives K'K two projections 
 of the point of contact of the required tangent from which K' f 
 the point of contact on the revolved right section, of a tangent 
 parallel to CD is found as in (3°). 
 
 II. The directing Instruments. — Taking the springing stone, 
 FBBTR', these will be as follows, besides Nos. 1 and 2. No. 
 3, the top, is a parallelogram of width B'T", and length b"i 2 . 
 Then with centre B, and radius b"i 2 cut DM at i 3i and Bi 3 will 
 be the position of b\ — B', after revolving till horizontal, about 
 AB as an axis, since i 2 is in that right section of the gallery 
 whose horizontal projection is MD. Then i 3 B and BP will be 
 two sides of the parallelogram, No. 3. 
 
 No. 4, the pattern of the vertical side of the stone, is of per¬ 
 pendicular width = eB", bottom length = BjD, and top length 
 = b"i 2 . One end is the vertical line BB', the other the arc 
 Dii of DY (2°) corresponding to D i 2 . 
 
 No. 5 is the pattern of the right section gB"I ,! R"F, used in 
 one method of working the stone. 
 
 No. 6, = I'B'BFR', is the pattern of the plane end. 
 
 No. 7, the pattern of the opposite cylindrical end, dif¬ 
 fers from No. 6, in that BB' would be replaced by the develop¬ 
 ment of the arc D i t ; and RR', by that part of DY, correspond¬ 
 ing to Dw 2 , while the developed joint R'F would be curved, as 
 
STONE—CUTTING. 47 
 
 found by means of an intermediate point u, as in Prob. V., 
 etc. 
 
 The remaining patterns require the construction of other de¬ 
 velopments. Making F"R/'N"E ,/ , Fig. 43 (taken on CD, only 
 to bring the figure within the plate), equal to the right section 
 FR^N^E, Fig. 42 ; note that the real distances, estimated on 
 elements, from the right'section, e'o'f j, to the heads of the arch, 
 are seen on the oblique projection. Then make F''F, Fig. 43, 
 =/iBi, Fig. 42, and in like manner passing from one figure to 
 the other, make R"R = p'q' ; 0"0 — o'o'" ; N"N = ji'Ni, and 
 E"E = g'Bj; and FRNE will be the development of the face 
 line , FO'E, of the plane end of the arch. 
 
 Next, make FH, Fig. 43, = BJ), Fig. 42 (i. e. F^H^/xD), 
 and likewise, RR X — q'r 2 ; NN X = Npi 2 , and EG = BjD ; and 
 HR^iG, will be the development of the face line of the cylin¬ 
 drical end of the descent. Then No. 8 = FRRxH, the devel¬ 
 oped intrados of the stone considered. 
 
 Finally, the centre, 00 : , of the plane end, to which its 
 joints radiate, is at the distance OiBi from the centre 0i(0") 
 of the right section ; hence in Figs. 43 and 42, respectively, 
 make 0 x 02 , at this distance, OxBi from the right section F^E" ; 
 make R0 2 = R'O ; or r0 2 = R^O", and 0 2 RI = OR'I'. Then, 
 in the two figures, make IIj = b"i 2 , and O 2 o 2 = BiD, and 
 IxRiO, will be the developed joint on the cylindrical end, cor¬ 
 responding to RT'O, Fig. 42, on the plane end. Hence No. 9, 
 = RIIjRi, is the pattern of the radial bed on R'F. 
 
 No. 10, = FBHD, Fig. 43, and similarly found, is the pat¬ 
 tern of the springing surface whose horizontal projection is 
 FBHD, Fig. 42. 
 
 Besides these patterns, bevels, Nos. 11 and 12, set to the 
 angles WI"0" and i 2 b" B , respectively, will be useful in one 
 method of working the stone. Also No. 13, giving the angle, 
 BB'T", between the side and top of the stone, in a plane of 
 right section. 
 
 III. Application. — 1°. The method by squaring. — Choose a 
 stone on which a right section can be formed, exterior to the 
 finished stone, by No. 1, and No. 5 = eB^P'R^F. Next, make 
 all the lateral surfaces square with this right section, by Nos. 1 
 and 2, and mark their edges by their patterns, Nos. 3, 4, 8, 9, and 
 10. This operation will give all the edges of both ends , which 
 
48 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 can thus be formed by cutting away the rough stone on the ends 
 down to them, applying No. l,in a direction parallel to AB on 
 both ends. This method is simple and accurate, but wasteful 
 of the atone between the actual plane end and the exterior 
 provisional right section, and of the labor of making the plane 
 surface of this right section. It may, however, be employed in 
 all cases, like many of the preceding, ’(Vhere the actual ends are 
 curved, or oblique to the right section. 
 
 2°. The method by oblique angled bevels. — Choosing a block 
 in which the finished stone can be inscribed, work first the ver¬ 
 tical side, that being the largest, and mark its edges by No. 4. 
 Second, work the top square with the former, if the arm of the 
 square in the top be guided by a small plane bevel , laid in the 
 top, and set to the angle «' 3 BF. Otherwise, use the level, No. 13, 
 held perpendicularly to the top edge B i (BD — b”if). Thence, 
 finish the top, by No. 3. Likewise work the under side, and 
 the radial bed on R/F — R/'I", the latter by No. 11, held per¬ 
 pendicular to the top edge, IIj, Fig. 43. Next proceed with 
 the plane end, using No. 12 to give its position relative to the 
 top. From the finished plane end, the lengths at all points 
 being known from the side elevation, the remaining sides and 
 the cylindrical end can be easily and accurately wrought. 
 
 Examples. — 1°. Make the side elevation in perpendicular projection 
 
 2°. Let the arch ascend from the plane end to the gallery. 
 
 3°. Construct the indicated pattern, No. 7. 
 
 4°. Let the descent be direct, BD perpendicular to AB. 
 
 5°. Construct the patterns for the key-stone. 
 
 6°. To avoid confusion, take X to the right of B. 
 
CLASS III. 
 
 Structures containing Warped Surfaces. 
 
 59. Warped faced wing ivalls. — Suppose that the inner 
 faces, as bm — b'm', Pl. I., Fig. 7, instead of being vertical, were 
 sloping, but in such a way that the lowest lines of the fronts 
 of the walls should be, as seen in plan, parallel to bm and np. 
 Thus let them be as at h'h". The rate of slope at mh, where 
 the wall is highest, would then be less than at bh", where the 
 wall is lowest. The face of the wall would therefore be a 
 warped surface, and would be a portion of a hyperbolic para¬ 
 boloid ; generated either by hh" , moving on bh" and mh so as 
 to remain horizontal; or by bh", moving on bm and hh", and 
 parallel to the vertical plane on mn. 
 
 Example. — Construct the case just described in a large figure, with an aux¬ 
 iliary elevation showing the face of one of the wing-walls ; and take the joints to 
 coincide with positions of hh" and bh". 
 
 Problem XI. 
 
 The recessed Marseilles Crate. 
 
 I. The Projections. — 1°. The problem is this. Given a 
 straight wall in which is a recess with diverging sides, and in 
 the recess a round topped portal, closed by gates of like 
 form; it is required to cover the top of the recess by a surface 
 which shall be agreeable, easily constructed, and practicable in 
 not interfering with the turning of the gate. Thus, having a 
 vertical straight wall, PI. VI., Fig. 45, bounded in thickness 
 by the parallel planes AB and C"D ; and in which is the pas¬ 
 sage EF, having a semicircular top, E'G'F', and covered by 
 gates of like form, fitted to the recess EFHI — HtE'G'G^F'P; 
 it is required to cover the diverging recess or embrasure re¬ 
 maining between the vertical planes HI and AB, in the man¬ 
 ner enunciated. 
 
 It will be agreeable that AH should be not less than HG, 
 tne width of the gate; and that the front top edge, AB— 
 
50 
 
 STEREOTOMT. 
 
 AI'B', of the recess should be arched, in which case the 
 vertical height, G"K', and the radius, AO — A'O", should be 
 so adjusted that A' and B' shall not be lower than G", the 
 highest point of the gate. 
 
 So much being fixed, let the axis, OY — O", of the arch, and 
 the face lines, H'G'T', of the gate recess, and A'K'B', of the 
 embrasure, be the three given directrices of a warped surface, 
 generated by the motion of a straight line upon them. (De3. 
 Geom. 251.) 
 
 One of these directrices, OY — 0", being straight, any de¬ 
 sired elements of the proposed warped surface may readily be 
 found by noting the points in which any plane containing 
 OY — O" cuts the other two directrices. Thus 00"A' is a 
 plane containing OY — O", the point AA' of the front face line, 
 and cutting HI — H'GH' at L/L, giving ALY — A'UO" for an 
 element of the warped surface. 
 
 But the limited directrices limit this warped surface by 
 the elements AL — A'L/ and BM — B'M', so as to still leave 
 undetermined the surfaces projected in ALH and BMI. 
 
 On extending the warped surface just formed, by producing 
 the directrix A'K'B', it will generally intersect the sides, AH 
 and BI, of the recess in curves, which would prevent the full 
 opening of the gates. 
 
 We therefore proceed to complete the proposed top of the 
 recess by means of warped surfaces having the two direc¬ 
 trices, OY—O", and H'G'T', in common with the preceding 
 warped surface, and for a new third directrix a curve through 
 II' and BB', so formed as not to interfere with the full open¬ 
 ing of the gate. This third directrix is conveniently shown, 
 first, in its real form, by revolving the face, BI, to a position 
 parallel to the plane V, when BB' will appear at GB'". 
 
 2°. Determining conditions of the neiv third directrix. These 
 are: — 
 
 lsi. That it should enclose I'G", and be tangent to it at V. 
 
 2 cl. That it should also contain the point' B'". 
 
 3 d. That the new warped surface directed by it should be 
 tangent to the preceding one along the common element, MB 
 — M'B', in order to avoid any visible edge of transition, or 
 break, in passing this common limit of the two surfaces. 
 
 The hist condition will be fulfilled if the two warped sur¬ 
 faces be made to touch each other at any three points of their 
 
ST ONE—CUTTING. 
 
 51 
 
 common element, YMB — 0"M'B'. But this they evidently 
 do at the two points, YO", and MM', since there the linear 
 directrices are the same for both surfaces. 
 
 Let BB' be the third point of YMB — O^M'B', at which the 
 two warped surfaces shall be tangent. For this purpose, they 
 must there have a common tangent plane. Such a plane will 
 be determined by two tangent lines at BB', of which the most 
 convenient are YMB — O^M'B', which is tangent to itself; 
 and B'T 7 , the tangent, at BB', to the directrix A'K'Bh Now 
 M'N', parallel to B'T', is the trace of this tangent plane on the 
 plane HI; and N', where it meets the intersection, I — FN', 
 of the planes HI and IB, is one point of its trace on the plane 
 IB. But BB' is another point of the same trace, which is, 
 therefore, in revolved position, N'B^. 
 
 The third directrix of the new warped surface is therefore, as 
 seen in the revolved position, a curve which shall be tangent 
 at I' to I'G", and at B'" to N'B'". 
 
 3°. Choice of curves. — Preferring a natural, to an artificial 
 curve for the directrix now determined, we may attempt an 
 ellipse having either FO'' produced for its transverse axis; or a 
 line from F, parallel to N'B"' for a diameter. But in either 
 case, unless its radius of curvature at I' be not less than 0"F, 
 it will intersect FG", and thus be impracticable. Hence the 
 choice must generally lie between a curve of two centres com¬ 
 posed of a part of I'G'', and an arc, tangent to it and to N'B" 
 at W n ; or a tangent line to FG ;/ from B"', with the portion of 
 FB'" from I' to the point of contact. 
 
 Preferring the former, draw B"'P, perpendicular to B'N', 
 and equal to FO" ; draw 0"P, and a perpendicular to it at its 
 middle point will meet B^'P produced at the centre of the 
 required arc. But this centre will generally be quite remote, 
 and too acutely determined for accuracy; hence proceed as 
 follows. The contact, f", of the two arcs may be found by 
 an application of the problem : To draw a line through a given 
 point, which shall pass through the intersection of two given 
 lines. Thus, construct any triangle, as 0 ;/ Pl, of which O" 
 shall be one vertex; the two others being on B m P and li, the 
 perpendicular at the middle of 0"P. Then draw 2, 3, parallel 
 to OP ; 3, 4, parallel to PI; and 4, 2, parallel to 0"1, will 
 meet 3, 2, in a point, 2, of the required radius, 0"2, which lim¬ 
 its the arc W'g'" at g"'. Having thus found g'", we can, when, 
 
52 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 as in practice, making the drawings on a very large scale, find 
 the arc B '"g"' by points as in (80). 
 
 4°. Test for Interference. The next step is to ascertain 
 whether the surface, generated by the gate-top in opening, in¬ 
 terferes with the top of the recess. The former surface is, for 
 the left-hand gate, for example, a portion of the annular torus 
 generated by the revolution of the circle of radius O^H' around 
 H — H'H 7 ' as an axis. In such a torus, the gorge or interior 
 opening reduces to nothing, and the portion used in the prob¬ 
 lem is generated by the quadrant H'GA The proposed test is 
 made by taking horizorital planes, as Q 'a', and finding whether 
 their intersections with the two surfaces intersect within or 
 without the jamb AH. Thus the plane Q 'a' cuts the gate 
 torus in the horizontal circle of radius HQ, and the top of the 
 recess in the curve ab Q, found by projecting a', V, etc., upon 
 the horizontal projections, Ic , LA, etc., of the elements which 
 contain them. When the circles as QtZ, described by points, as 
 QQ' of the gate, everywhere intersect the curves, like Q ba, cut 
 from the recess roof by the respective planes of these circles, 
 outside of AH, as at <i, no interference exists. But when, as 
 at n, the curve Life and circle L ne intersect within the jambs, 
 there is an interference. In the latter case, one or more of four 
 means may be used to remedy the difficulty : — 
 
 ls£. To increase the radius K'O', estimated from K'. 
 
 2d. To raise the point K7, without increasing the radius 
 K'O'. 
 
 3 d. If the interference is very slight, a portion of the recess 
 roof may be hewn out to coincide with the torus generated by 
 H'G", without disfiguring the surface by abrupt or too obvious 
 changes of form. 
 
 4th. The radius of the gate-top may be slightly diminished. 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments. The construction of these 
 will be best illustrated by showing patterns of all the devel¬ 
 opable surfaces of the most irregular one of the voussoirs, viz., 
 that between the radial joints q’o' and r’u'. 
 
 Besides the straight edge, and square, and the rectangular 
 patterns of the top, and of the vertical side, at wV, of this 
 stone, Nos. (1-4), there are, No. 5, a pattern of the back end, 
 q'o'v'u'r'; No. 6, that of the front end, shown at B 'm'o'v'u't'; 
 No. 7, that of the radial joint at r'u', which is shown by re- 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 53 
 
 vaiving it into the horizontal plane CjB", after supposing the 
 back. C r, D, of the wall to coincide with the vertical plane. 
 Then E 'r x = rr n ; c\g l = the perpendicular distance of g from 
 C"D ; T 1 £i=CC", etc. No. 8 shows, in like manner, the joint 
 in the plane 00 "o ; and No. 9 = BFig. 46, the true 
 size of the surface I g —B r g r t f , forming a part of the jamb IB. 
 
 Bevels may also be provided, set to as many of the diedral 
 angles, as mJo'vm'cfr', etc., as may seem best. Nos. 10, 11, 
 etc. 
 
 III. Application . Form the plane rectangular top, to the 
 dimensions, o'v' and CC" of pattern No. 3; then the three 
 vertical plane surfaces, viz., the two ends, and the side on u'v', 
 square with each other and with the top, and shaped by their 
 patterns, 4, 5, and 6. Work the radial beds square with the 
 back, just completed by No. 5, checking their positions by the 
 right section bevels, 10, 11, etc.; and scoring their edges by 
 patterns 7 and 8. The portion, EV^^, determines the cylin¬ 
 drical surfaces on r'q' and p's', and the annular plane portion, 
 p'q'r's '. 
 
 Every edge of the warped portion of the stone being now 
 determined, this 'surface can be wrought by the straight edge, 
 No. 1, held in the direction of elements of the surface, and 
 these will be found by transferring their extremities as k! and 
 h\ M 7 and B', from the drawings to the stone. 
 
 THE OBLIQUE ARCH. 
 
 60. This, the most extended of all the problems in Stone 
 Cutting, is usually made the subject of a separate treatise ; for 
 which its many and marked varieties, as well as its complexity, 
 make it sufficient. Yet, by the full and careful exhibition of 
 all the essential features of its usual form, the student can be 
 prepared both to design and superintend the construction of 
 an oblique arch as commonly built, and to read the works in 
 which the subject is treated more elaborately. 
 
 Preliminary Topics. 
 
 Elementary Mechanics of the Arch. 
 
 61. Let ABC be an ordinary semi-cylindrical arch, of which 
 we will first consider only one half, as ABTa, Fig. 4. Let G 
 
54 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 represent the centre of gravity of this half, and GH its weight, 
 acting vertically downward. The half ABT, as a whole, and 
 
 B 
 
 thus actuated by its unresisted weight, would fall, by turning 
 about a as a centre. As it would prevent the use of the arch 
 to oppose GH by props underneath, it is counteracted by a hori¬ 
 zontal force acting, as at T, at any point of BT, and this hor¬ 
 izontal force consists in the reaction of the other half, BTC, of 
 the arch and its immovable backing. This understood, as a 
 force may be considered as acting at any point on its own 
 proper line of direction, the pressure at T, and the weight con¬ 
 centrated at G, may be considered as both acting at g ; the for¬ 
 mer at gt , the latter at gh , whence $rR would be their resultant. 
 Now it is necessary for the stability of the half arch that yR 
 should intersect the base of the arch between A and a, to pre¬ 
 vent rotation about one or the other of those points ; and what 
 is thus evident for the half arch as a whole, is true of the sep¬ 
 arate stones of which it is composed. That is, by considering 
 the successive segments from BT to the successive radial joints 
 of the arch, in the same manner as just explained for the 
 whole, we should find a series of forces like ^R, one for each 
 segment, and whose intersections would form a polygon, called 
 the line of resistance, which should lie wholly within the arch 
 in order to secure its stability. 
 
 62. Passing to the oblique arch, (25), Fig. 5, it is evident 
 from the foregoing explanations that the portions, ABC and 
 ADEC, of the left half, are only more or less imperfectly sup¬ 
 ported by the opposite half. Hence, in discussing the oblique 
 arch relative to its stability, it is usual to consider it as divided 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 55 
 
 by planes parallel to a face, as GH, into an indefinite number 
 of laminae ; each of which will be a right arch of a span equal 
 to ah, the oblique span of the given oblique arch. 
 
 Fig. 5. 
 
 That is, the “ thrust ,” “ lines of pressure ,” or “ lines of re¬ 
 sistance ” in an oblique arch , are assumed to act in planes 
 parallel to its faces. 
 
 The resulting standard or essentially perfect design for an 
 
 Oblique Arch. 
 
 63. The conclusion of the last topic affects the form and 
 disposition of the joints of an oblique arch, and thence their 
 graphical construction, in the following manner: — 
 
 When two surfaces are pressed together , the pressure at each 
 point should act in the direction of the normal to the surfaces 
 at that point. Else it can be resolved into two components: 
 one, normal to the surfaces; and one parallel to them, which 
 will tend to produce slipping. 
 
 Thus, if the surfaces of two bodies meet in the plane whose 
 trace upon the paper is AB, Fig. 6, and are acted upon by a 
 force producing a pressure at any point, p, which may be rep- 
 
STEREOTOMY. 
 
 06 
 
 resented by OP^pPj, this pressure may be decomposed at 
 any point as p of its line of direction into the normal com- 
 
 0 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 P 
 
 St 
 
 t 
 
 
 \ 
 
 pj 
 
 N 
 
 
 \ i Fig. 6. 
 
 \ , 
 
 
 _ 
 
 ..i 
 
 Ni Pi 
 
 ponent jt?N 1 =ON; and the parallel component jt>S 1 = OS; 
 which last will tend to produce slipping in the direction jf?S x . 
 
 64. In applying this principle to the design of the joints 
 seen on the intrados (19) of an oblique arch, the “ transverse ,” 
 “ heading ,” or “ broken' 1 '’ joints are made in planes parallel to 
 the faces, and thus represent on the arch itself the direction of 
 its thrust. The “ longitudinal ,” “ coursing ,” or “ continuous ” 
 joints are then made so that each shall intersect at right angles 
 all the transverse joints which it meets. 
 
 65. On account of the rectangular intersections of the joints, 
 arches thus designed are often described as forming the orthog¬ 
 onal system. On account of the equilibrium of the pressures 
 thus acting in them, they are also often called equilibrated 
 arches. 
 
 The coursing joint is also often called the trajectory. 
 
 Problem XII. 
 
 The partial, and trial construction of the orthogonal or equili¬ 
 brated arch. 
 
 66. Construction of a coursing joint. — ls£. In vertical 
 projection. Let the plane \J, PL VI., Fig. 48, be considered 
 as parallel to the faces ABC and DEF of the arch. These 
 semicircles, with the equal ones having any convenient number 
 of equidistant points o , tq, o 2 , etc., on DC, as centres, represent 
 the vertical projections of sections of the arch parallel to its 
 transverse joints (64). Now, first, a line is normal to a curve 
 at a point, when it is perpendicular to the tangent at that 
 point; and, second, as wc learn from descriptive geometry, if 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 57 
 
 one side only of a right angle be parallel to a plane, the projec¬ 
 tion of the angle on that plane will be a right angle. Hence 
 in the figure, as the tangents to the circles ABC, etc., are 
 parallel to V, the vertical projection of the normal curve to all 
 these circles will be perpendicular to the projections of their 
 tangents at its intersections with these circles. Thus, if a 0 ac l 
 represent an arc of the curve, it will be perpendicular at a to 
 the tangent aT, and therefore tangent at a to the radius ao. 
 Hence we have the following construction : — 
 
 Let a be one of the points of division of one face, ABC, of 
 the arch, through which a coursing joint is to pass. Draw the 
 radius ao ; from a x , its intersection with circle o x , the radius a 1 o l ; • 
 from <r 2 , intersection of a x o x with circle o 2 , draw the radius a 2 o 2 ; 
 from a 3 , similarly found, the radius a 3 o 3 , etc.; and the line 
 aa x a 2 . ... a n , thus found, will nearly coincide with the required 
 curve; only that all the points except a are evidently a little 
 too low. It is an advantage, however, that the errors are wholly 
 on one side of the truth. 
 
 Now draw ao x , meeting circle o x at c x ; thence c x o 2 , likewise 
 
 giving c 2 ; thence c 2 o 3 , etc., and again, ac x c 2 . c n will be 
 
 nearly the required curve, but all its points besides a will be a 
 little too high. How now shall we approximate more closely 
 to the correct curve ? 
 
 67. At this point a general observation upon the relative 
 exactness of constructions made by plotting to scale the results 
 given by analysis from numerical data, or by geometrical con¬ 
 struction from graphical data, may be useful. The finest lines, 
 as perfect both in length and direction as can be laid down on 
 a large scale , and with the nicest care, on firm and smooth 
 paper, will give results equal, in nearly or quite every case, for 
 all practical purposes, to those of analysis. 
 
 The perfect length and location of lines are analogous to 
 absence of errors of calculation ; and fineness and large scale of 
 construction are analogous to the carrying out of numerical 
 computations to a large number of decimal places. 
 
 Besides, in all cases where drawings are necessary as guides 
 in the execution of a work, the results of calculation are ex¬ 
 posed to instrumental errors in plotting them to scale. 
 
 68. Returning now to the means of approximating to ihe 
 true curve, any one or more of the following methods may be 
 employed. 
 
68 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 1°. Increase to any desired extent the number of circles be¬ 
 tween the faces, ABC and DEF, of the arch ; since this will 
 evidently cause the curves aa- 0 and ac 5 , which are on opposite 
 sides of the true curve, to approach each other ; that is, will 
 cause either of them to approach the true curve. 
 
 2°. Bisect the spaces a x c x , a 2 c 2 , etc., and the curve through 
 the points thus formed will sensibly coincide with the true 
 curve ; especially in a figure drawn on a large scale, and with 
 numerous auxiliary circles. 
 
 3°. Bisect the distances oo l ; o 2 o 2 , etc., between the centres 
 of the successive circles ABC, etc., at the points 1, 2, 3, etc., 
 and draw «1, which will evidently divide a x c x at some point as 
 %, not shown. Then draw 2; meeting a 2 c 2 , at a point n-j, 
 etc., and a n x n 2 , etc., will very nearly coincide with the true 
 curve. 
 
 4°. Suppose the point Wj, just described, to be a point of the 
 true curve. Then, observing that the curvature of the required 
 curve rapidly increases as it ascends, tangents to it at a and n x 
 would meet nearer to a than to n. Hence assuming t as one 
 point of a required curve, draw £o 5 , and take r on the part ts 
 and a little nearer t than to s ; and draw ro 4 , and on the portion 
 t x 8i of this line take r x , nearer the middle of ^ than r was to 
 the middle of ts ; thence draw r x o 3 , and on the portion t 2 s 2 of 
 this line take r 2 nearer the middle of t 2 s 2 than r x was to the 
 middle of t x s x ; and so on ; and ttfa, etc., will be very exactly 
 the true curve, tangent at £, t x , t 2 , etc., to to 5 , ro t , r x o 3 , etc. 
 
 Example. —Work out each of the above four methods with the circles ABC, 
 etc., drawn to a radius of at least three inches. 
 
 69. Horizontal projection of a coursing joint. — Assum¬ 
 ing merely for illustration that ac s is the true vertical pro¬ 
 jection of such a joint, simply project its points upon the 
 horizontal projections of corresponding circles, as a at a’; c x at 
 c\; c 2 at c 2 , etc.; where the accents are given to the horizontal 
 projection , as is sometimes done, when the vertical projection is 
 first made , or of most service. 
 
 70. Development of a coursing joint. — Let the cylin¬ 
 der A'C'D'F' be first made tangent to the horizontal plane 
 along the element, CF — C'F', and then rolled out upon that 
 plane. All its elements will then be parallel to C'F' in de¬ 
 velopment, and at distances from it equal to the true lengths 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 69 
 
 of the arcs of right section between them and C'F\ Hence 
 make m n n' equal to the true length of the elliptic arc m'n'— 
 mn of right section, as it would appear projected upon a 
 plane perpendicular to the axis 00 5 — oo 5 . (This construction 
 is not shown, for want of room). Likewise v’o'q equals the 
 true length of the elliptic arc (arc of right section, whatever it 
 may be, in any case) v'a ' 0 '— va 0 ; and q'a" equals the true 
 length of a f q' — aq; etc. for any sufficient number of points. 
 Then p'm v d§; C'a n ; q’c'l , etc., are the developments, all 
 alike, of the equal semicircles, a' 0 p' — a 0 p ; OC' — oC ; etc.; 
 and etc., is the development of the coursing joint 
 
 a[c 5 — a 0 c 5 ; and it crosses the developed semicircles at right 
 angles. 
 
 71. Identity of form of the coursing joints. — Through any 
 point, as a, Fig. 48, draw an element meeting the other circles 
 at points as h , homologous with a. It is perfectly evident from 
 (70) that, if we construct the trajectory passing through b , as 
 in (66), it will be of the same form as that through a. That is, 
 all the trajectories have parallel tangents at points on the same 
 element, and hence are all alike. 
 
 Likewise, the horizontal projections, and the developments 
 of like portions of the trajectories are identical in form. Hence 
 having any projection or development of any trajectory, the 
 portion of any other one included between the same elements 
 of the cylinder would be drawn simply by a card-board pattern 
 of this initial one. 
 
 72. Convergence of the coursing joints. — It will be imme¬ 
 diately evident on constructing any other coursing joint, as the 
 one through m'm for example, that these joints converge, rap 
 idly at first; as they approach CF — C'F' in the direction from 
 C' to F', and DA — D'A' in the direction from D' to A' when 
 produced indefinitely in both of these directions. 
 
 The result of this convergence is, that no two stones in the 
 same course are alike; though stones in like positions in differ¬ 
 ent courses are so. This greatly increases the number of 
 necessary patterns, difficulty of execution, and the expense of 
 constructing an equilibrated arch. 
 
 73. Generation of the joint surfaces. — We know that 1°, the 
 normal to a surface at any point is perpendicular to the tangent 
 plane at that point; 2°, that when a line is perpendicular to a 
 plane, the projections of the line are perpendicular to the 
 
60 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 traces of the plane. Now aT is the vertical trace of the tan¬ 
 gent plane to the intrados along the element ab , at aa'; its 
 horizontal trace would be a line through T, parallel to C'F'. 
 Hence the normal to the intrados at aa! , for example, is oa — 
 a'a n . If then an arm de, normal, at c 2 , be fixed to a rod 
 OiO which coincides with the axis 00 5 , and if the rod and arm 
 move together, the rod moving so as to coincide with the axis, 
 and the arm, so that the point c 2 of the arm, shall continue on 
 the semicircle 0 2 u, the point d, considered as one point of the 
 extrados, will generate the transverse joint of the extrados , cor¬ 
 responding to the semicircle 0 2 u of the intrados; and the por¬ 
 tion c 2 d will generate one of the transverse joint or heading 
 surfaces; which is thus everywhere normal to the intrados. 
 
 Likewise , the rod O x O continuing to coincide with the axis 
 as it moves, with the arm, let the pair move so that the point 
 <?2 of the arm shall trace the coursing joint a'c b , the point d 
 will then trace the extradosal trajectory corresponding to a!c$ 
 of the intrados, and the line c[d will generate the normal joint 
 surface having a!c h for its directrix. 
 
 74. Nature of the joint surfaces. — These are evidently both 
 warped, but of a variable twist; the former, the transverse 
 one, is so by reason of the variable relative velocity of the axial 
 and the rotary motions of the frame Oi ed, which is imme¬ 
 diately evident on constructing any three of its positions ; the 
 latter, the coursing joint surface, is variably warped by reason 
 of the variable curvature of the coursing joints. 
 
 75. Summary. — Without detailed drawings, or further in¬ 
 vestigation, five grave practical objections to the equilibrated 
 arch are already apparent. 
 
 1°. The inequality of the stones in each course, resulting in 
 the evils already noted (72). 
 
 2°. The variable twist of the normal joint surfaces, which 
 still further complicates their execution. 
 
 3°. The non-parallelism of opposite faces of the same stone, 
 whereby the actions and reactions upon those faces are not in 
 the same line, and therefore in the aggregate yield resultant 
 couples, tending to produce rotation of the arch about a verti¬ 
 cal axis. 
 
 4°. The convergence of the coursing joints, while like points 
 of each are not, as we have seen, in the same section parallel 
 to the face, also makes the stones in the face of unequal width, 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 61 
 
 unless they are arbitrarily made equal by breaking joints with 
 those behind them. 
 
 5°. The same convergence, finally, renders it impossible to 
 build equilibrated arches of common brick, as is often de 
 sirable. 
 
 For these reasons, we shall here dismiss the equilibrated 
 arch, only referring the reader, who wishes to become familiar 
 with its details, to the works of Bashforth , Graeff , and Ad- 
 hemar ; and shall seek an approximation, which, as nearly as 
 possible, retains the merits, but avoids the defects of the equili¬ 
 brated arch. 
 
 We will begin by seeking a simpler form of warped surface, 
 normal to the cylindrical intrados, for the heads and beds of 
 the voussoirs. 
 
 The Helix. 
 
 76. Let o — O', 12', PL VII., Fig. 50, be a fixed axis, and 
 let 0,0' be the initial position of a generating point which has 
 these two simultaneous motions; one of revolution around that 
 axis, and one of translation , parallel to it. By the first motion 
 alone , the point, 00', would generate the circle 0,3,6,9,12 ; by 
 the second alone , the straight line, 0 — 0'12' ; but, by both 
 motions combined, it would generate the curve called a helix. 
 The height 0'12' corresponding to a full revolution, 0,3,9,12, is 
 called the pitch of the helix. 
 
 The usual case is, that each of these motions is uniform , 
 giving rise to the common helix; or simply the helix, as com¬ 
 monly understood. 
 
 77. Three elementary properties immediately follow from the 
 definition just given. 
 
 1°. The helix will lie on the convex surface of a cylinder of 
 revolution whose axis, o — 0'12', is that of the helix; and whose 
 radius is the perpendicular distance 0 o of the generatrix 00' 
 from the axis. 
 
 2°. Since the two component motions of the generatrix, one 
 around the cylinder at right angles to its elements, and the 
 other, parallel to them, are each uniform, the path of this point, 
 i. e. the helix, must cross all the elements at a constant angle. 
 
 3°. It now follows that when the convex surface of the cyl 
 inder is developed, the development of the helix ivill he straight, 
 for the elements of the cylinder will be parallel in development, 
 
62 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 and a line which crosses parallels at a constant angle must be 
 straight. 
 
 It thus appears that the joints, CD X , KQ X , etc., BJV, C5, 
 etc., Fig. 49, primarily chosen as convenient and sufficient sub¬ 
 stitutes for the theoretic ones of the orthogonal system, are 
 helices. 
 
 78. The construction of the helix also follows immediately 
 from its definition (76), as is shown in PI. VII., Fig. 50. 
 
 For let the distance O'12' on the axis, be the height attained 
 by the generatrix while also making one revolution around the 
 axis from 0,0' to 12,12'. This revolution is evidently indicated 
 in horizontal projection by the circle of radius oO. Then, as 
 both motions are uniform, divide this circle, and the correspond¬ 
 ing height (pitch) 0'12( into the same number of equal parts, 
 and draw horizontal lines through the points of division on the 
 axis, and number them, as shown, to correspond with the num¬ 
 bers of their horizontal projections, oO, ol, etc. Then project 
 up 1, 2, 3, etc., from the plan upon the lines similarly num¬ 
 bered in elevation, at 1', 2', 3', etc., and the curve O', 1', 2', 3', 
 etc., will be the vertical projection of the helix. 
 
 Theorem II. 
 
 The projection of the helix on a plane parallel to its axis is a 
 
 sinusoid. 
 
 A sinusoid is a curve in which if the abscissas , 0'5', 0 'g\ etc., 
 are equal to, or proportional to the arcs of a given circle, the 
 corresponding ordinates l'b'. 2 'g', etc., are equal to the sines of 
 those arcs. Now 1 'b' = the sine of the arc 01 in the plan ; 
 2 'g\ — that of the arc 02 in the plan, etc.; and the spaces 0'6', 
 0 'g', etc., are proportional to those arcs. Hence, the curve O', 
 1', 2', 3',.12' is a sinusoid. 
 
 The Helicoid. 
 
 79. Let now all the points of the horizontal line oO — O', 
 PI. VII., Fig. 50, have the same two simultaneous motions that 
 have just been given to its outer point, 00'. Every point of the 
 line oO — 0' thus describes a helix, having the same pitch, 0'12', 
 and whose horizontal projection would be a circle centred at o. 
 All the consecutive helices, from the axis 0'12', to O', 1', 2' 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 63 
 
 3'.12', and so on outward without limit, thus described, 
 
 will constitute the surface called a right helicoid. The portion 
 within the cylinder of radius oO, is shown by the shaded area 
 of Fig. 50. 
 
 80. The surface just defined is called a helicoid , because its 
 generatrix , the line, o 0 — O', moves upon a given helix , as 
 
 O', 1', 2', 3'.12', as a directrix; and a right helicoid 
 
 because this generatrix is perpendicular to the axis o — 0'12'. 
 The surface is the same as that of the screw surfaces of a 
 square threaded screw, or of the plastering on the underside 
 of circular stairs. 
 
 The right, helicoid is evidently normal to the convex sur¬ 
 face of the right cylinder having the same axis , since all its 
 elements are perpendicular to the axis of that cylinder. 
 
 Thus we see that the joint surfaces of the voussoirs (18) nor- * 
 mal to the cylindrical intrados of the oblique arch are right 
 helicoids. 
 
 Problem XIII. 
 
 A segmental oblique arch , on the helicoidal system. 
 
 I. 81. The Projections. Primary outlines. — Let ABCD, 
 PI. VII., Fig. 49, be the plan of the intrados of a segmental 
 (27) arch having a square span , AG, of 13 ft. ; an angle of 
 skew , CAB, of 54° ; and a perpendicular length, yy x , of 14 
 feet, between the vertical planes, AB and CD, of the faces. 
 
 Let EF — O" be the projections of the axis of the arch, 
 taken perpendicular to the plane V, and let the arc A'E'B' of 
 120°, centred at 0", indicate the extent of the segment of the 
 cylinder of revolution, which forms the intrados. 
 
 Then ABJljC is evidently (see PL III., Fig. 28, etc., the 
 development of the intrados; where CC X = 15L708 = the 
 length of the right section Cc 3 — A'E'B'; and the curves AB X 
 and CD X are the developments of the face lines, AB — A'E'B', 
 and CD — A'E'B' ; as will be presently explained more in 
 detail. 
 
 This being understood, and the curve CD X representing, at 
 each point, the direction of the thrust of the arch at that 
 point (62) the straight line CD X symmetrical with the curve, so 
 nearly coincides with it as to sufiiciently replace it as a proper 
 direction for the developed transverse joints of the intrados, 
 
64 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 but, being straight, is evidently the development of a helical 
 arc (77, 3°). 
 
 This settled, next divide the straight line CD, into the odd 
 number of equal parts, chosen as the number of voussoirs, in 
 the width of the arch, in this case nine. Then, as the trans¬ 
 verse and coursing joints should be nearly or quite at right 
 angles to each other, let the developed coursing joints, Bpv, 
 etc., be perpendicular to CD 4 , or as nearly so as the length 
 or width CCj., if unalterable, will allow. Such coursing 
 joints, being evidently both parallel and equidistant, the arch 
 may be built of brick if desired, (75, 5°) and, if of stone, all 
 the voussoirs in all the courses will be of equal width (75, 
 1°, 3°, 4°.) 
 
 Returning to Fig. 50, and comparing Figs. 49 and 50, the 
 axis of the arch replaces the axis o — O', 12', and is perpendic¬ 
 ular to V- Hence, A'E'B' is the vertical projection of the 
 right cylindrical surface of the intrados, and of all the helices 
 traced upon it; and the horizontal projections of these helices 
 will be similar, in form and construction, to the vertical projec¬ 
 tion of the helix in Fig. 50. 
 
 82. Horizontal projections of transverse helical joints on the 
 intrados. — KQ X , parallel to CD^ being the development of 
 one of these joints (77, 3°), and Iv& 4 that of the right section 
 at K, shows that Q x & 4 is the partial pitch due to the arc A'E'B' 
 of the circular projection of the same helical joint. By counter 
 development, Q x & 4 returns to Q,& 3 . Hence, if we divide A'E'B' 
 and Q& 3 , each into the same number of equal parts, numbered 
 similarly from B' and Q as zero points, the points of the hori¬ 
 zontal projection, KPQ, of the helix considered, will be at the 
 intersection of the projecting lines from 1', 2', 3', etc., on 
 A'E'B', with parallels to Iv& 3 , through the corresponding points 
 on Q k 3 , as shown in the figure. Thus, M 2 and B 3 are projected 
 from 2' and 3' upon the second and third parallels from Q. 
 
 83. Horizontal projections of intradosal helical coursing joints. 
 — In like manner, R 1 S 1 T, one of the parallels drawn through 
 points of equal division on CDj is the development of so much of 
 coursing joint as lies on the given segment of the cylinder taken 
 to form the arch. Tr 5 is, therefore, its proportion of the pitch 
 (76) of a coursing joint, and A'E'B' is its vertical projection. 
 Then, as before, divide Tr 5 and A'E'B' into the same number of 
 equal parts, number similarly from B' and r s as zero points, 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 65 
 
 and the intersections of projecting lines from 1', 2', 8', etc., 
 with the parallels to Rr 5 through the like numbers on Tr 5 , will 
 be points R . . . R 2 , R 3 , etc. of the coursing helix RST. 
 
 84. Construction of horizontal projections of helices from their 
 developments. — The above constructions, having been inserted 
 to render them more intelligible by their analogy with Fig. 50, 
 it will now be shown that the sinusoid (Theor. II.) projection 
 of the helix can be found from its circular projection and devel¬ 
 opment. For the same parallels that divide Q x & 4 = Qk s , the 
 pitch of KPQ — A'E'IV into equal parts, divide the develop¬ 
 ment, KQj, of the same helix into the same number of equal 
 parts ; and the like is true of R X T. Hence, in cases like the pres¬ 
 ent, where the developments of the helices of the intrados are 
 given, their horizontal projections, as QPK, are most naturally 
 found as the intersections of the projecting lines from 1', 2', 
 3', etc., on A'E'B', with perpendiculars to the axis EF, from the 
 developments of the same points, 0 4 , M 3 , B 4 , etc., thus giving 
 respectively 0 3 , M 2 , B 3 , etc., on QPK. 
 
 All the other intradosal helices are found in a precisely 
 similar manner, as is now sufficiently evident by inspection. 
 
 85. The development of the face lines of the intrados. — 1st 
 Method. Parallels to AC through the points of division 1, 2, 
 3, etc., on AB X , are the developments of the elements whose 
 vertical projections are the vertical projections 1', 2', 3', etc., 
 of the same points of division. The horizontal projections of 
 the extremities of these elements are found by projecting 1', 2', 
 . ... 6', 7', etc., upon both face lines, AB and CD, as at 6 
 and 7 on AB, and 7 on CD. Thence, in being developed, 
 they pass in planes 6— z x ; 7 — z 2 , etc., perpendicular to the 
 axis EF, to z x , z 2 , etc., of AB X , and from 7, etc., on CD, to vn, 
 etc., on CDj, upon the developed elements, 7 vn, etc. 
 
 86. Construction of the developed face-line as a sinusoid. 
 (Theor. II.) If the equal divisions of A'E'B' be projected upon 
 AB, as at 6, 7, etc., these points will divide AB in a certain 
 manner. If the latter points be thence projected upon GiB x , 
 projection of AB upon G X D X , the lines AB and G X B X will be 
 divided similarly ; hence, if B 1 m 5 G 1 be an arc similar to A'E'B', 
 and on the chord B X G X , it will be divided equally by the paral¬ 
 lels to GG X , through the points B .... 6, 7, etc., on AB. 
 Hence, we may regard the arc B x tw 5 Gi, and the straight line 
 B X A, as respectively the circular projection and the develop- 
 
 & 
 
66 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 ment of a helix, points of whose sinusoid projection, B 4 A, are 
 found as the other like curves, KPQ, have been, from like 
 data ; viz., at the intersections of parallels to GG 4 , from m l . . . 
 m G , m 7 , etc. with parallels to GjBj through like points, 1, 2, 3, 
 . ... 6, 7, etc., on the straight line B 4 A. 
 
 87. Useful limits of the arc of the intrados. — These are evi¬ 
 dent from the development while considering the helical joints. 
 Were the arch extended to a 3 u 4 — A 0 A 4 , so as to become full 
 centred (27), CD X would be extended each way, as shown at 
 DiD 2 , where = A'A 0 , and D >d 2 = a 3 v ; and the angle at 
 D 2 is 90°. Hence, we see that parallel coursing joints, quite 
 nearly perpendicular to the face line between C and D x , as is 
 desirable,— become more and more oblique to it as we approach 
 Do on D : D 2 . Moreover, as can readily be imagined with a 
 given case in view, the greater the obliquity, that is the more 
 acute the angle CAB, the less should be the segment taken to 
 form the intrados. 
 
 88. The extrados. — While the outer surface of the actual 
 arch would be left rough, yet it is convenient to represent an 
 ideal extrados, or extrados of construction, to aid in forming 
 the voussoirs. 
 
 Such an ideal extrados is a cylindrical surface having the 
 same axis as the intrados, and terminated by the same vertical 
 planes of the faces. Its projections are, therefore, AiB 2 C 1 D 2 , 
 and the arc A 2 F'B 2 concentric with A'E'B'. Then A 2 C 2 and 
 B 2 D 2 are the outer springing lines. 
 
 The intrados and extrados being thus concentric cylinders, 
 the point, as qV> 2 , in which the generatrix, Q q — B'B 2 , per¬ 
 pendicular to the axis EF — O" (79), of any of the helicoids 
 intersects the extrados, will generate helices upon the extra¬ 
 dos, whose developments and horizontal projections will be 
 found in the same manner as has now been explained for the 
 intrados. 
 
 89. Development of the extrados. — As the helicoidal sur¬ 
 faces of the voussoirs are right helicoids (79), their elements 
 are perpendicular to the axis EF — O" ; hence K k and Qq, 
 perpendicular to EF, are such elements, and the outer helix 
 (helix on the extrados) corresponding to the inner helix 
 (helix on the intrados) KPQ will extend from k to q. Hence, 
 making n 9 a 2 = A 2 FB 2 = 20'.9I (77, 3°) a 2 c x , parallel to B 2 D 3 
 is the developed position of A 2 c ; and, carrying k across to this 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 67 
 
 lino at &!, gives qk x as the development of the helix from q 
 to k. 
 
 The other developed transverse helices, as ba x and dc x , are 
 parallel to qJc x , and are similarly divided, to give the developed 
 extradosal coursing helices bd 4 , and the parallels to it, corre¬ 
 sponding to BJV, and its parallels on the intrados. 
 
 90. Contrast between the intrados and extrados. — Here we 
 meet with two points of difference. First — As the pitch, 
 Q& 3 , is the same for both of the helices, KQ X and qk x , while 
 the latter is longer, the angles o x qo and o x oq are greater than 
 the corresponding angles 0 4 QiOi and QiChCh of the intrados. 
 Hence qo x o and its equals at all the intersections of helices on 
 the extrados, are less than Qi0 4 0i, and all like angles on the 
 intrados. 
 
 Second — As the outer helix , corresponding to an inner one 
 from C to D, connects c with d, while the outer face line is 
 C 2 D 2 , corresponding to the inner one CD, the developed extra¬ 
 dosal face line, D 2 c 2 , and extreme helix, dc x , do not terminate 
 at the same points, as they do on the intrados where the like 
 lines are CvnDi and C7D 2 . 
 
 91. An interesting consequence of the first of the preceding 
 differences is, that to equalize the angles qo x o, and Qj0 4 0i, so 
 that the helicoidal surfaces should be normal to each other 
 somewhere between the intrados and the extrados, the initial 
 coursing joint, Bjiv, should be drawn to a point, IV, on the 
 side towards D 1? next to a?, the foot of the perpendicular from 
 Bj to CDj, whenever x does not coincide with one of the points 
 of division of CD X . 
 
 92. The construction of the developed face lines. — This may 
 be either as at 1'", etc., by projection from 1", etc., to 1, etc., 
 on CD, and transference thence, by perpendiculars, to BD, to 
 elements through ri 2 , etc.; or as at B 2 <z 2 by the sinusoid projec¬ 
 tion of a helix, from B 2 n 5 n 9 , and ba x , the latter substituted, 
 without affecting the result, for a straight line, B 2 a 2 , as its cir¬ 
 cular projection and development. Either method is obvious 
 on inspection, in connection with the like constructions of the 
 developed face lines of the intrados. 
 
 The construction of the horizontal projections etc., and 
 rS£, etc., of extradosal helices, is now obvious by inspection. 
 Thus m 2 is the intersection of the projecting line with 
 
 m' s m 2 perpendicular to EF. 
 
STEREOTOMY. 
 
 6« 
 
 93. Convenient checks upon the accuracy of the horizontal 
 
 projections and developments of the helices and face lines occur 
 as follows : First — The necessary intersection of correspond¬ 
 ing inner and outer helices on EF, in horizontal projection, as 
 at L, S, P, and N, because the elements of the right helicoids 
 containing such helices are vertical at these points. Second — 
 The developed positions as L x and l ly or N x and % of such 
 points are in the same line, L : L l u or perpendicular to 
 
 EF, and on EjF x and e lt /j, the developments respectively of 
 EF — E' and EF — Fh Third —As helices from C to D and 
 from c to d necessarily cross EF at F, the middle point of CD 
 (as in Fig. 50 the helix crosses 0jl2 / at its middle point, 6'), 
 their developments, CD t and dc u cross; the first, CviiDj and 
 EiFj at F x , the middle point of CvuDi; and the other, dc x and 
 e ifi at/,, the middle point of dc x . 
 
 94. Completion of the abutments . — These being alike, the 
 construction is shown only on one. The back of the abutment 
 is properly stepped by vertical planes, parallel and perpen¬ 
 dicular to that of the face (which represents the direction of 
 the thrust (62) of the arch), as shown at o Z x , and mZ x . Then, 
 having regard to symmetry, and to the protection of the cor¬ 
 ners of the abutment, make niL = o Z : , and draw BZ ; and, for 
 the opposite end of the abutment, make the angle D 2 Dz= ZBB 2 , 
 and D z = BZ. These last details being, however, unessential, 
 may be varied at pleasure. 
 
 95. The face joints. — These are the intersections of the 
 planes of the faces with the coursing helicoids. 
 
 Now, referring to Fig. 50, as all the elements intersect the 
 axis, and are perpendicular to it, any plane containing the axis 
 or a perpendicular to it at any point of a helix, will contain an 
 element of the helicoid. 
 
 Comparing with Fig. 49, the plane, AB, of the face for ex¬ 
 ample, does not contain S, P, or L; hence, it does not contain 
 elements of the helicoids SRr, K&P, or MmLI, which it there¬ 
 fore intersects in curves. It intersects the coursing helicoid 
 SRr in the face joint R"V". 
 
 96. The direct construction of the face joints will then be, to 
 project the points as R'" (derived from R"", extremity of a 
 coursing joint on the developed inner face line) at R'; and r nt , 
 likewise derived from rf on the developed outer face line, at 
 r '; when RV, though straight, would very nearly be the 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 69 
 
 proper face joint. And so we might operate to find all the face 
 joints. 
 
 97. Representation by tangents. — The face joints are so 
 nearly straight, especially in a segmental arch, that their tan¬ 
 gents, at their inner extremities, may often be sufficient to 
 represent them. Now we know from descriptive geometry: 
 first, that the tangent line at a given point, t , of the intersec¬ 
 tion of any plane, P, with a surface, S, is the intersection of 
 the plane P with the tangent plane to the surface S, at the 
 point t ; second, that the tangent plane to a helicoid, at a given 
 point, is determined by the element through that point and the 
 tangent to the helix through that point. 
 
 98. The following construction depends on the principles just 
 given. Let the tangent at R'"R/ be constructed. First — AB 
 is the plane of the curve, and its trace on the plane, EE X , of 
 right section is E — 0"F'. Second — The tangent plane at 
 R^'R', to the helicoid, RrS, is determined by the element 
 R m L 2 —R'O", and the tangent, at R m R', to the helix, RS — 
 B'R'E. Now the tangent to a helix at a given point lies in 
 the plane which is tangent to the cylinder containing the helix, 
 along the element containing the given point, and it makes the 
 same angle with that element that the helix does. But as the 
 latter angle is constant for all the elements, the development 
 of the helix, upon the tangent plane must coincide with its 
 tangent in that plane. 
 
 Hence the tangent at R' is the vertical projection, and 
 R' m R", coinciding with S^, is the development of the tangent 
 line at R m R'; and R^W" is the projection, upon EE X , of the 
 portion R'^R" of this tangent. Hence make R'W 7 = R"W 7/ , 
 and W' will be one point of the vertical trace, on the plane 
 EEj, of the tangent plane to the helicoid RrS, at R W R'. But 
 the element , R ,// L 2 — R'O", is parallel to the vertical plane 
 EEi, hence W'U', parallel to R'O" is the vertical trace of the 
 auxiliary tangent plane. This meets E — O^F', the like trace 
 of the plane of the curve, at U 7 , which is therefore one point of 
 the required tangent line. The given point of contact R W R' is 
 another; hence ER"'—U'R' is the tangent, at R W R', to the 
 face joint through that point. 
 
 99. Focus of like Tangents to Face Joints. — Draw R'X, 
 
 perpendicular to the horizontal 0"X. ; and perpendicular 
 
 to U'W' and hence to O'^R'. The angles at U' and R r in the 
 
70 
 
 STEREOTOM Y. 
 
 triangles 0 ,, U 1 U 7 and I^XO'' thus formed are therefore equal, 
 and those at Ui and X are equal, being right angles. Hence 
 these triangles are similar ; whence we have : — 
 
 0"U' cos. U'O^Ui= 0"^ (1) 
 
 Also, 0"U 1 = R'W' (2) 
 
 Remembering that R'W 7 =R ,, W"; and calling the pitch, 
 = 8Tr 5 , of the entire helix, 3RST, = 7i, we have 
 
 R'W'=- 2 - ° -—. R""W". (3) 
 
 From the triangle R ,,, EE 2 ; R ,/, E 2 = EE 2 tang. R'"EE 2 (4) 
 
 But, EE 2 = 0"X. (5) 
 
 and 0"X=0"R'cos.R'0"X; or, 0"X=0"R' cos. U'0"U x (6) 
 
 Now cancelling all the terms which are common to the two 
 columns of left hand and right hand members in these six 
 equations, and multiplying together the remaining terms in 
 like columns, we have : 
 
 0"U' = 2tt.O"R* tan. R"'EE 2 
 h 
 
 CO 
 
 Now in this equation, every term in the right hand member is 
 constant, hence 0"TJ' is constant. 
 
 We thus find the interesting property that the tangents to 
 all the face-joints at their inner extremities , meet at a common 
 point on the vertical line through the centre F,0" of the face 
 of the arch. 
 
 The point U 7 is called the/belts, and the distance 0"XJ r , the 
 eccentricity of the arch ; or, more strictly, of the intrados ; 
 for it is evident that a similar construction exists for the extra- 
 dos , or for all the points in any cylinder, concentric with the 
 intrados. 
 
 100. Condensed construction of Foci. — U' being indepen¬ 
 dent of the position of R' on A'E'B', take A 0 « 3 , the point in 
 the horizontal plane of the axis, and draw through it a devel¬ 
 oped helix as a 3 u meeting the plane of right section FF t (cor¬ 
 responding to EEj) at u , then, projecting a 3 on FFj at o", gives 
 o"u = 0"U'. 
 
 Likewise, for the extrados , take A 4 a 4 , corresponding to A 0 «j 
 m the intrados, and draw a A v parallel to the developed extra- 
 dosal helices, foil, etc., and project ci 4 A 4 on FFi at 0 2 , then 0 2 v 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 71 
 
 will be the eccentricity to lay off from 0", giving U" as the 
 focus for the extrados ; so that, for example, r' U ,r is the 
 vertical projection of the tangent at r n, r' to the face-joint 
 R"V" — RV. 
 
 101. Foci for any Cylinder concentric with the Intrados. — 
 
 If, in a given arch, we take such a new cylinder, only the 
 _ 2 
 
 terms CF'U 7 and 0"R' will change; hence, as is readily obvi¬ 
 ous, calling R 0 , Ro> etc., the successive values of the radius 
 0"R( and calling the consequent positions of the focus, U', U", 
 etc. we have, 
 
 K - etc 
 
 0"U 7 — 0"U" — 
 
 Then putting qt^j, = c, we find O'U 7 ' = - 
 
 whence CV'U" is found simply as a third proportional. Thus 
 having drawn U'Aq, and A 0 T, perpendicular to it, gives 0 ,r T 
 (on 0"F' produced) = c ; since R^ = (CV'Ao) 2 = 0"U" X 0"T. 
 Then c being constant, draw for example TA 4 , and A 4 U" per¬ 
 pendicular to it, and U" will be the focus of A 4 F'B 2 , which is 
 chosen for illustration, to save additional lines. For, 
 
 (0"A 4 ) 2 = 0"U"X 0"T 
 
 (0"U") = as above. 
 
 In this simple way we finally find the focus for any cylinder, 
 and thence as many tangents as we please to each face joint in 
 making an exact working drawing on a large scale. In the 
 figure, then, the face joint RV will be a curve, tangent to U'R' 
 at R' and to U'V at r'. 
 
 102. Curves of the Face-joints. — To get an idea of these, 
 see Fig. 50 again, where PQP', PiQiPj (PiQi not shown) and 
 P 2 Q 2 P 2 are three parallel planes cutting the right helicoid 
 shown by the shaded area of the figure. 
 
 Auxiliary horizontal planes will intersect both the helicoid 
 and any one of the given planes in straight lines, whose inter¬ 
 section, in each of the auxiliary planes, will be a point of the 
 required curve. 
 
 Thus, taking the plane PQP', the horizontal plane O'Q cuts 
 from the helicoid the element oO —O', and from the plane, 
 the line PQ. These being parallel, meet only at infinity; 
 
72 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 hence PQ is an asymptote to the curve. The plane b'V cuts 
 from the helicoid the element o 1 — b'V , and from the plane, 
 the perpendicular to V at c', which meets the element at c'c. 
 Likewise, project d' at d , etc. Then at o' the intermediate plane 
 o'a’ cuts from the helicoid the element oa — o'a', and from the 
 plane, the line oO — o' which meet at oo', showing that the 
 horizontal projection of the curve passes through the centre of 
 the circle 0-3-6-12. Next, the plane 6'q' cuts the helicoid 
 and the given plane in parallels at 6' and q' respectively, which 
 only meet at infinity, hence qr is another asymptote. The 
 branch, cdoq, meets this asymptote at infinity towards q ; while 
 the new branch projected from s', t',u'... . e', f at s,t,u .... 
 e,/meets the same asymptote at infinity towards r, and the 
 asymptote/&, in the plane, 12'/, at infinity towards/. 
 
 Thus we see that the entire intersection consists of two 
 branches ; and that when the given plane, PQP', as here placed, 
 cuts the helix twice on the same side of the axis , as at h' and v', 
 the curve is shaped as at s t e, and does not pass through o ; but 
 that when it thus cuts the helix but once, as at the point a little 
 below c', the curve does pass through o, in the horizontal pro¬ 
 jection. 
 
 103. Applying this construction to the arch ; AB represents 
 the plane PQP ; of Fig. 50, and each coursing helicoid, in suc¬ 
 cession, will represent the helicoid of Fig. 50. Taking the 
 helicoid, RrS, for illustration, the intersection of AB with suc¬ 
 cessive elements parallel to Rr would, when projected upon the 
 vertical projections, B^B' ; 1"1', etc., of these elements, be the 
 vertical projections of points of the indefinite face joint R'r'; 
 and a parallel to EF, at s 2 , the intersection of the plane AB 
 with the plane Ss l5 would be an asymptote to this curve which 
 would resemble cdoq in Fig. 50. 
 
 104. Other projections. — In finished drawings for exhibition 
 or other purposes, elevations on planes parallel to the face, or 
 to the axis, may be desired. These are easily made, as shown 
 in Fig. 51, a fragment of the vertical section through the axis. 
 A"E"B" is the right section of the intrados, and the parallels 
 to A"B" through its points of equal division 1, 2, 3, etc., are the 
 vertical projections of the elements at 1', 2', 3', etc., on the new 
 plane. 
 
 The portion, RS, of the inner helix, RST, is then projected ; 
 R, at Rj; R 2 , at Rj; S, at Sj, etc. Other helices could be 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 73 
 
 similarly projected. The projections of the half face lines, ER 
 and FD, would be elliptical arcs. 1 
 
 II. The directing Instruments. — These are — 
 
 No. 1. The straight edge, applicable to any ruled surface, 
 in the direction of its straight elements. 
 
 No. 2. The mason’s square, applied wherever two lines, or 
 two surfaces are to be perpendicular to each other. 
 
 No. 3. The pattern, MmZ^O, of the bed of a top stone of 
 the abutment; also called an impost stone , or springer. 
 
 No. 4. The modification of No. 3, applicable to the bed, 
 DdZ 4 z, of the springer at the obtuse corner, D, of the abut¬ 
 ment. 
 
 No. 5. The second modification of No. 3, for marking the 
 bed, MmZB, of the springer at the acute corner, B, of the abut¬ 
 ment. 
 
 No. 6. The bevel, A 2 ,A'T, for marking the joints I i, K&, 
 etc., of the skew-back (19) in the plane, U'0"A[. 
 
 No. 7. The internal impost arch square, D"B'l', for marking 
 right sections of the intrados of the springers, in their proper 
 positions relative to the face of the abutment. 
 
 No. 8. The external impost arch square, 18Ajt 7 , which de¬ 
 termines right sections of the extrados, in case they are wrought 
 of a cylindrical form, in their true relation to the level tops, as 
 J Yi, of the springers. 
 
 No. 9. The flexible pattern, CfiO.jQ!, of the intrados, II 2 J, 
 of a springer. 
 
 No. 10. The corresponding flexible pattern, iiYia u of the 
 extrados, ii 2 j, of a springer. 
 
 Nos. 11 and 12. The modifications of No. 10, which, put 
 together, equal No. 10, and which apply to the partial extra- 
 dosal surfaces of the two end springers ; which exist in conse¬ 
 quence of the different points, a x and a 2 , at which the developed 
 face line, B 2 a 2 and helix ba a , terminate. 
 
 No. 13. The twisting frame, 20, 21,22 — 20', 21', 22'. This 
 consists of three rulers, lying in three planes of right section, 
 and, as shown by the drawing, coinciding with three elements, 
 
 1 While writing these pages, an article on skew arches, by E. W. Hyde, C. E., 
 has appeared in Van Nostrand’s Magazine, Feb.-April, 1875; which may be 
 read with much interest by those who have acquired a sufficient knowledge of De¬ 
 scriptive Geometry, of its applications to the problem as exemplified in the mainly 
 graphical construction which I have here given ; and of higher mathematics. 
 
74 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 20 — 20'; 21 — 21', and 22 — 22', of a coursing helicoid, C^Sj. 
 Their perpendicular distances apart in a direction parallel to 
 the axis , are given in plan. Their angles with the horizontal 
 plane are given in the elevation. From these data they can 
 be rigidly framed together ; and can then be used to deter¬ 
 mine elements, in their true relative position upon a helicoidal 
 side of a voussoir ; having first notched upon their edges their 
 intersections with the helix C S 2 . In order that No. 13 may be 
 shifted along to determine successive elements, the perpendicu¬ 
 lar from 20 to 22 should be less than the length of the side of 
 the stone taken in the direction of the axis, and hence called 
 its axial length. 
 
 No. 14. The soffit frame. — This, used in case the intrados 
 of a stone is wrought first, consists of three parallel pieces, 23, 
 24, 25, framed together in planes of right section and giving 
 arcs of right section of the intrados, as R 3 SPr ,/ ', of a stone. 
 Their circular edges can be notched, by the aid of the draw¬ 
 ings, so as to show their intersections with the inner helical 
 edges, as R 3 S, of the voussoir. 
 
 No. 15. The arch square , e 3 We^ used in giving the cylindri¬ 
 cal intrados of a stone from its helicoidal side when the latter 
 is wrought first. 
 
 No. 16. A small, plane bevel, of the angle between a cours¬ 
 ing joint and an arc of right section ; and held against the 
 curved arm of No. 15, in the intrados, in order to guide No. 
 15 in a plane of right section. 
 
 No. 17. The helix templet, 5 4 <7 4 <? 4 , whose curved edge, though 
 circular, will sensibly coincide with an inner helical arc, as 
 B 0 B 3 , when placed against the helicoidal side of a stone. Mak¬ 
 ing the perpendicular from d± to & 4 c 4 , equal to that from 7', for 
 example, to the chord of the two divisions, as 6'-8', the eleva¬ 
 tion of an arc equal to 5 4 <? 4 , we have three points, b i d i and <? 4 , 
 to determine the required arc. No. 17 must be applied to give 
 a helical edge as B 0 B 3 , before No. 15 can be applied, in succes¬ 
 sion to No. 13. 
 
 No. 18. A flexible pattern, MjM 4 M 3 B 4 , of the development 
 of the intrados of a stone, gives the three remaining inner heli¬ 
 cal edges of that intrados, as B 3 M 2 , M 2 M, and MB 0 , after hav¬ 
 ing found one, B 0 B 3 , by No. 17. Or, after beginning with No. 
 14, it will, by the aid of No. 16, give all these edges. 
 
 No. 19. Fig. 52, is a bevel frame for working the helicoidal 
 
<-z; 
 
 STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 75 
 
 side of a stone from its cylindrical intrados, after having fin¬ 
 ished the latter by Nos. 1, 14, and 18. 
 
 No. 20. The radial joint bevel , u x C£X^ is used jointly with 
 No. 17, as indicated by the figure, to locate the corner edges as 
 B 3 5 3 of a stone upon the indefinite helicoidal side. 
 
 No. 21. The flexible pattern, p 2 p s q 2 q 3 , which replaces No. 18, 
 for a voussoir which appears in the face of the arch. There 
 must be a pattern of this kind for every voussoir of one end of 
 the arch. 
 
 ■'"No. 22. This is a bevel varying for each stone in the face of 
 the arch, and giving the angle between the tangent to the face 
 joint, and the tangent to an inner coursing helix, at their inter¬ 
 section on the face-line. 
 
 We find this bevel for the point R m R' as follows : The tan¬ 
 gent, R/U 7 , to the face-joint, meets the horizontal plane, A'B', 
 at yiy 2 . The tangent, R'Y 2 , to the coursing helix through 
 R'^R' pierces the same plane at Y 2 Y 2 , where Y 2 is thus found. 
 R lWl , on the developed intrados, is the length of the vertical 
 projection of the development of the portion, R'"^ — R'B\ 
 of this helix ; hence making R 'w' = R^, and projecting w’ 
 upon ~R x Wiiv at w, gives R n 'w, the horizontal projection of R 'w\ 
 the tangent to the helix at R^'R'. Then projecting Y 2 upon 
 R '"w, gives the trace Y 2 of this tangent upon A'Bh Hence 
 Y 2 y 2 is the like trace of the plane of the required angle, Y 2 R'"y 3 
 — Y 2 Rh/ 2 . To find this angle we have only to revolve R^'R' 
 about Y 2 y 2 as an axis, into the plane A'B' at a point R 6 , not 
 shown ; when Y 2 Rgy 2 will be the required angle. 
 
 No. 22 is sometimes obtained mechanically, while building 
 the arch, as follows, Fig. 7. Let ILF be a portion of the upper 
 
 surface of the centring, coinciding therefore with the intrados of 
 the arch, and on which the inner helices of both kinds, and the 
 face-lines, are carefully chalked by means of thin flexible rules 
 bent over the centring, and through points transferred upon 
 chalked elements from the drawings. 
 
76 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 Let FL be the face-line, and IH an inner coursing joint; 
 and let r, tq, r 2 be three arcs of right section. Then set up and 
 fasten together three arch squares (No. 15) in the three paral¬ 
 lel planes of r, r x , and r 2 ; and tack on a strip oh, whose upper 
 edge shall coincide with a coursing helix, by being equidistant 
 from the angles of the squares, where it crosses their radial 
 arms. Then pass a plumb-line, pb , along oh till, as at n, the 
 bob rests on the face-line, when no will be a face-joint, and I cn 
 will be the required angle. 
 
 No. 23 is a pattern of the face of a face-stone, as FS ] B ,/ , one 
 end of which is in a face of the arch. It would be found, for 
 each stone, on an elevation parallel to the face. 
 
 III. The Application. — This division of the problem will be 
 sufficiently illustrated by the working of two of the principal 
 stones; viz., one of the intermediate springers, and one of the 
 voussoirs. 
 
 The springer, IYJI.A — AT^'A^YTO. 
 
 This, being the most irregular stone, is further represented 
 in oblique projection, Fig. 53. As in all other cases of irregu¬ 
 lar bodies, the stone is conceived to be inscribed in a rectangu¬ 
 lar prism, 14, 15, 16, 17 — 10, 11, 12,13, from whose corners 
 the points of the given body may be located by rectangular co¬ 
 ordinates, which will therefore be seen in their true size in the 
 oblique projection. 
 
 Merely adding that like points are lettered or numbered with 
 like letters or numbers, the figure will mostly explain itself. 
 Thus, ii 3 , Fig. 53, = ii 3 from the plan ; i 3 k = ii 2 from the 
 plan; and ki 2 — 26t 7 from the elevation. Similarly for all 
 other points, horizontal distances are taken from the plan, and 
 vertical ones from the elevation. 
 
 1°. Bring its bed, ODZ go, Fig. 53, to a plane in the usual 
 way, and mark its form by No. 3. 
 
 2°. On the edges given by No. 3, as directrices, work the 
 lateral vertical faces, DZil, ZyiY, etc., Fig. 53, square with 
 the bed by No. 2 ; and thence the level portion, Yji, of the 
 top. 
 
 3°. With No. 6, mark the joints, J j and It, or test them. 
 
 4°. With No. 7, form channels of right section in the cylin¬ 
 drical face, II 2 J ; bring it to a cylindrical form by No. 1 applied 
 in the direction of the elements, and mark its edges by No. 9. 
 
STONE CUTTING. 
 
 77 
 
 5°. With No. 8, No. 1, and No. 10, similarly complete the 
 cylindrical triangle, iitf, of the extrados. 
 
 6°. Work the helicoidal cheeks, Ii7 2 L and «)'IJ, which re¬ 
 ceive respectively a side and an end of adjoining voussoirs, sim¬ 
 ply by dividing the helical arcs, II 2 and ii 2 and JI 2 and yi, each 
 into the same number of equal parts, and applying No. 1 upon 
 the corresponding points of division, as shown in Fig. 53. 
 
 A voussoir. — As we face the vertical plane, one of these 
 stones is, in detail, as follows : is its front end or head., 
 
 forming a part of the transverse helicoid M'mLIz. Its opposite 
 and equal back end or head , is M 2 w 2 fr 3 B 3 . Its right side or bed , 
 M»)M 2 w 2 j is a part of the coursing helicoidal surface, beginning 
 at M m. Its left hand bed is the equal surface B^B,.^. Then 
 MB 0 M 2 B 3 is its cylindrical intrados, whose development is 
 M 1 M 4 M 3 B 4 , and whose vertical projection is B'3'. Its similar 
 extrados is mb-jn^b^ whose development is mm' 3 b a b G , and vertical 
 projection B 2 <? 4 . 
 
 To form this stone from the rough block, choose a block in 
 which the finished stone could be inscribed, then — 
 
 1°. By No. 13, form one of its indefinite helicoidal beds, as 
 MwiM 2 wz 2 . In doing this, first cut three elements on which the 
 edges of No. 13 will apply; then placing rule 20 on the second 
 element, and rule 21 on the third element, rule 22 will be in a 
 position to determine a fourth element of the same helicoid. 
 
 In the same way any number of other elements may be 
 found, and the stone between them cut away by No. 1. 
 
 2°. By No. 17 and 20, placed together as shown on the plate, 
 mark the helical inner edge MM 2 , in its proper position relative 
 to the determining elements marked by No. 13. 
 
 3°. By No. 15, having its straight arm applied to the ele¬ 
 ments given by No. 13, and its curved arm guided in a plane 
 of right section by No. 16, applied on a small temporary plane 
 area cut on the intrados, cut any desired number of arcs of 
 right section in the intrados, MB 0 M 2 B 3 ; and finish the intrados 
 as a cylindrical surface, by No. 1, placed in the direction of 
 the elements, as shown in the plan. 
 
 4°. By No. 18, placed in the cylindrical intrados, first 
 wrought, and with one of its edges coinciding with MM 2 , mark 
 the three remaining edges of the intrados. These edges will 
 serve as directrices of the three remaining helicoidal surfaces 
 of the stone. 
 
78 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 5°. By No. 15, or, more exactly, by No. 19, Fig. 52, which 
 consists of Nos. 1 and 15, very accurately made and firmly 
 braced together, work the helicoidal bed, BoB 3 fiA; and mark 
 its corner edges, B 3 6 3 and B/^, by Nos. 17 and 20 together. 
 
 6°. Having now finished all the faces of the stone, except 
 the extrados, which is to be left unwrought, and the ends, the 
 latter can be wrought by No. 2, the square, from the intrados; 
 one arm being held in the direction of the elements of the in¬ 
 trados, and the other applied to corresponding points of division 
 of B 3 M 2 and 5 3 m 2 , transferred from the drawings. 
 
 In working a face-stone, as R 3 R/ , V // , use No. 22 instead of 
 No. 20, No. 21 instead of No. 18, and No. 23 in working the 
 face. 
 
 Systems of Oblique Arcli Stone-cutting. 
 
 105. Adhemar, with great elaborateness of graphical illus¬ 
 tration and refinement of detail, devotes no less than eighty- 
 three pages and seven large plates, to several different methods 
 of cutting the stones of an oblique arch, arranged under two 
 systems. 
 
 1st. The method by squaring , in which a rectangular prism 
 of stone is first formed, in which the finished voussoir can be 
 inscribed, and from whose sides, or edges, those of the required 
 voussoir can be located with the square, by measurement. 
 
 2d. The method by bevels. This method is illustrated by 
 the use of No. 2 (6— 9), 15, and 19; a system which might 
 be extended by framing Nos. 13 and 14 together, or by adding 
 to No. 19 a second arch square, whose straight arm should be 
 to the left of EE, giving the relative position of an element , 
 and a right section of the intrados, and an element in each 
 helicoidal bed, all in one frame, or compound bevel. 
 
 106. Choice of circumscribing block. This point, which 
 may perplex a beginner, working only by the first of the above 
 methods, may be settled in three ways. 
 
 First Method. The sides of the circumscribing rectangular 
 prism may all be either parallel or perpendicular to the plane 
 of right section. Thus, for the voussoir R 3 SR 6 r 6 , the length of 
 the prism (the prism not shown, to avoid confusion), would be 
 the perpendicular between the radial elements at R 3 and R 6 r 8 ; 
 while its width and thickness would be shown in elevation by a 
 rectangle circumscribing 5'5f2 'm', since the vertical projections 
 of r-i and r 6 are and m'. 
 
STONE—CUTTING. 
 
 79 
 
 This method is the most elementary, requiring, besides the 
 square and straight edge, only Nos. 18 and 28; but it is obvi¬ 
 ously very wasteful of labor and material. 
 
 Second Method. Taking the same voussoir as before, pro¬ 
 ject all its corners upon a plane tangent to the extrados along 
 the element mid-way between r 6 and r 6 . Then the least rect¬ 
 angular prism will be that, one of whose sides shall be in this 
 tangent plane, and which shall include within it all the corners 
 of the stone. By this method there will be very little waste 
 of material in any case. And if this prism be first wrought, 
 the voussoir can be simply extracted from it mostly by squar¬ 
 ing from the edges of the prism, as before. 
 
 If, to save labor, the voussoir be wrought directly from the 
 rough block, the latter will be chosen similar to the prism here 
 described, but larger, and the method of cutting will be that 
 above described in detail. 
 
 The price of labor and material will determine whether it 
 will be best to cut the finished prism , or to risk an occasional 
 spoiled voussoir mis-cut directly from the rough block, or from 
 a block which by an error of choice may be too small. 
 
 Third Method. Here the faces of the circumscribing prism 
 are all parallel or perpendicular to the plane of the face of the 
 arch. This method is particularly adapted to a voussoir one 
 end of which is in the face of the arch, and can therefore be 
 immediately marked upon the face of the finished provisional 
 circumscribing prism. 
 
 107. Adaptation to a cut stone spandril. In this case, the 
 tops of the face-stone are finished with vertical and horizontal 
 surfaces, as in PI. IV., Fig. 30, and extending through the 
 thickness of the surmounting parapet. The horizontal sur¬ 
 faces are plane , and the vertical ones are cylindrical, having 
 the extradosal coursing helices for their directrices. The cut¬ 
 ting of the face-voussoirs thus designed, offers no special diffi¬ 
 culty. 
 
 Useful Numerical Data. 
 
 108. By some writers the problem of the oblique arch has 
 been treated almost wholly by the equations of its lines, and 
 of their projections; from which all its points could be located 
 by merely plotting to scale the results of computations, made 
 by substituting numerical data in the formulas. 1 
 
 1 Baiiltfurth, London, 1855. Buck, London, 1839. Graef, Paris, 1853. 
 
80 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 But sucli treatment is less adapted for general use than the 
 graphical one, as most thoroughly exhibited by Adhemar ; and 
 which is all-sufficient, mainly on account of the simplicity and 
 similarity of the principal lines, on which all the points depend. 
 Nevertheless, a few simple formulas, such as all can use, are 
 useful as checks upon purely graphical constructions, especially 
 when the latter are of half, or whole size, upon a platform, as 
 they should be in practice. 
 
 109. Such formulas are the following, with the numerical 
 data, and results, used in the present example, substituted : — 
 
 The half span O m B' = S = 6.5 ft. 
 
 O m B'O f/ = a — 30°. 
 
 Then 0"'0" = S. tan a = 3.75 ft. 
 
 and 0"B' = R = y/S* + 0'"0" 2 = 7.5 ft. (7.504 ft.) 
 
 Again, let the angle of skew, EAC, = 0 
 then EAG = 90° — 0, 
 
 whence BG = 2S. tan (90° — 0) (1) 
 
 and AB = v'AGP+BG^ y/ 13 2 +(2S. tan (90 — 0)* 
 
 oc 
 
 or, AB = 2S. sec. (90 — O') = 2S. cosec 6 = ——. 
 
 v ' sin 0 
 
 Also CC, = A'E'B' = 1 = R X .0174533 X 120° (2) 
 
 = 15.708 ft.; 
 
 where A'E'B' = 120°, 
 
 and .0174533 is the length of 1° where R= 1°. 
 
 Likewise, putting 0"B 2 = R x , 
 
 jyz 2 = A'zF'Bt = k = R x x .0174533 X 120°, (3) 
 
 where R x =7.5 -j- 2.5 = 10, whence n 2 a 3 =. 20.94 ft. 
 
 Further ; let C 2 y 4 , perpendicular to AB, = L = 14 ft. 
 
 Then, as A 2 C 2 y i = (90 — 6 .) 
 
 AC = BjDj = A 2 C 2 = L. sec (90 — O') = L. cosec 0 = 
 
 x y sin 0 
 
 And, see (1) and (2), AB X = CD, = VAGf+B x Gf (4) 
 Now suppose CD 4 to be divided into n equal parts of which 
 
 Diiv are m parts. Then D,iv = — CD.. 
 
 n 
 
 or, in this example, see (4), D,iy= $. CD^ 
 
 Let ABiGi = BjDiC = /?, then = tan /2. Or, as by (1) 
 BxGi = BG = 2S. cot 6 
 
 % 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 81 
 
 AG l 
 
 2S. cot 0 
 
 = tan (3. 
 
 In tlie triangle B^IV, we now know two sides and the in¬ 
 cluded angle /?, whence the angle DjBjiv, or y, and thence its 
 complement can be readily found. 
 
 But B^ is already known, as = CC 1? and calling N 2 , the 
 point where the developed spiral BjN^ meets the springing line 
 AC produced, we have, in the right-angled triangle ^B^e, 
 N 2 6 6 = CCj tan (90 — y) =, in this example, one third of the 
 pitch, P, of a coursing spiral, of either the intrados or ex- 
 trados. 
 
 Comparing the triangles, 0"0'"B' and 0"o"'B 2 and calling 
 o" , B 2 = s, we have 
 
 R : 0"'B' :: R x : s. 
 
 R 
 
 whence s = ~. S, 
 and A 2 n 9 = 2s = 2 S. 
 
 from which B 2 w 9 = 2s. tan (90 — 0) (6) 
 
 and A 2 B 2 = y'(2s) 2 —j— B 2 wj. 
 
 Then, calling afia± = 8 = B 2 t?(? 1 . 
 
 Tan 8 = ^4 (see (1) and (3)) 
 and ba Y =\/’B G 2 4-/? or, = 
 
 T 11 sin y 
 
 Such simple calculations as these will form an ample check 
 on any graphical errors. 
 
 Modifications of the Orthogonal and the Helicoidal Systems. 
 
 110. Among these are, first , the following minor ones : — 
 
 1°. Making the heads of the voussoirs plane instead of heli¬ 
 coidal ; which may be done without sensible error in large 
 arches. 
 
 2°. The substitution of vertical plane surfaces for vertical 
 cylindrical ones (107) in the spandril steps of large arches. 
 
 3°. The substitution, always unadvisable, of separate hy¬ 
 perbolic paraboloids, for the helicoidal beds of the voussoirs; 
 as in taking B 3 5 3 and B^ as the directrices of a hyperbolic 
 paraboloid to be generated by a straight line moving upon 
 them so as to divide them proportionally. 
 
 6 
 
82 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 4°. Avoiding the acute diedral angles , between the face and 
 the intrados, near the acute angles, as B, of the abutments, by 
 terminating the cylindrical intrados by a plane parallel, and 
 near to AB ; through r 5 for example, and then completing the 
 intrados between this plane and AB by a conoid , whose direc¬ 
 trices should be the ellipse in the plane r B , and a vertical line on 
 BD, as at Q, and equal to ; and whose plane director 
 
 should be horizontal. 
 
 5°. The substitution of brick for stone; either wholly, or ex¬ 
 cept in the face ring of stones. 
 
 6°. The substitution of a circular for an elliptic face. This 
 will make the right section an arc of an ellipse whose longer 
 axis will be vertical. 1 
 
 111. Among much more important kinds of modification , are 
 the following: — 
 
 1°. Convergent arches. — When an arch is quite long, the 
 central portion of it may properly, and with great economy, 
 be built as a right arch, either of brick or stone. Then, near 
 the ends the coursing joints may gradually bend till perpendic¬ 
 ular to the face line at their intersections with it. 
 
 2°. Hart's System? — In this system, the transverse joint 
 surfaces are planes , parallel to the face ; while each coursing 
 joint surface is a conoid , generated by a line moving parallel 
 to the face as a plane director, and upon the axis, and a helical 
 coursing joint as directrices. 
 
 3°. Cylindrical coursing joint surfaces. — This very inter¬ 
 esting modification of the orthogonal or equilibrated system, is 
 strongly advocated by Adhemarfi first , as dispensing with all 
 cut surfaces except plane and cylindrical ones, so related as to 
 be the ones most easily wrought with economy of material, la¬ 
 bor, and graphical construction; second , as wholly avoiding those 
 components of pressure which act towards the faces, and tend 
 to produce dislocation. 
 
 The transverse joint surfaces in this system are planes par¬ 
 allel to the face. 
 
 The coursing joint surfaces are the horizontal cylinders, per- 
 
 1 Such arches, on the helieoidal system, are the subject of a work by Praly, 
 Paris, 1853. 
 
 2 John Hart. London, 1848. 
 
 3 Only regretting that prescribed limits imperatively forbid adequate illustra¬ 
 tion of this system; the reader is referred to the ample exhibition of it given by 
 Adhemar, Paris, 1861. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 83 
 
 pendicular to the plane of the face, which project the trajec¬ 
 tories, or intradosal coursing joints of the orthogonal arch, 
 Prob. XII., upon the plane of the face. 
 
 4°. The Cow's Horn. — The form of oblique arch whose in- 
 trados is a portion of the warped surface so named, may be 
 substituted, in case of small arches, as oblique door-ways. 
 See PI. VII., Fig. 54. 
 
 The Cow’s Horn (Corne de Vache) is a warped surface, of 
 the kind having three given directrices. In its usual form, 
 it is generated by a straight line, AC — A'C', moving so as 
 always to rest upon two equal and parallel semicircles, AB — 
 A'N'B', and CD — C'N'D', whose diameters are in the same 
 plane ; and upon a straight line, 00" — O', perpendicular to 
 the planes of these semicircles, at the point of symmetry O'. 
 
 This surface is the intrados of the arch. The semicircles 
 are its face lines. The semicircle on L'M' is the ideal extrados 
 of construction. The face-joints, as a'c’ and m’p', are in pairs, 
 symmetrical with O'N'; the coursing joints, ab — a'b', etc., are 
 elements of the warped surface; and the available height of 
 the passage is O'N'. This height diminishes with the increas¬ 
 ing obliquity of the arch, till, when A' and D' coincide, the 
 arch degenerates into two cones, tangent to each other on 00" 
 — O' and the passage becomes closed. This is an objection to 
 this form of arch. 
 
 Examples. — 1°. Make a full construction, with patterns, etc., for the Cow’s 
 Horn. 
 
 2°. Do. of a segmental, helicoidal arch, left- handed, that of Prob. XIII. being 
 n^t-handed, of 12 ft. span, 55° skew, 120° arc of right section and 2 ft. radial 
 thickness, and 12': 6" perpendicular between faces. 
 
 3°. Do. of a full centred, helicoidal arch, with 60° angle or skew. 
 
 4°. Construct an arch on the cylindric system. 
 
 5°. On Hart’s system. 
 
 6°. A segmental, helicoidal, left-handed arch of 14 ft. span; perpendicular 
 length 12 ft., 48° skew; 135° arc of right section; radial thickness 2 ft., 2 in., and 
 with the face voussoirs adapted to a cut stone spandril wall. Add several oblique 
 and isometric projections of springers and voussoirs. 
 
 Wing- Walls. 
 
 112. Prismatic and pyramidal wing-walls have been suf¬ 
 ficiently illustrated in outline on PI. I., Figs. 6-9. The vertical, 
 quarter-cylindrical one, with an oblique plane top as in PI. I., 
 Fig. 8, is described in my “ Elementai'y Projection Drawing.” 
 The top of the straight wall, which contains the face of the 
 
84 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 arcli, or passage, and which is flanked by the wing-Wall, is some¬ 
 times horizontal: while either wing-wall is a segment of a 
 cylinder, cut off obliquely, as in Pl. I., Fig. 9. The top of either 
 wing-wall is then a portion of a right helicoid, having a vertical 
 axis ; that is, if such a wing-wall were a quarter-cylinder, its 
 coping would be one quarter of a revolution of a square-threaded 
 screw of stone. 
 
 All the foregoing forms are in use in the wing-walls of small 
 arches, culverts, and mounded cemetery vaults. 
 
 There yet remain, however, two forms of wing-wall, adapted 
 to larger structures, and which will now be described. 
 
 113. PI. VIII., Fig. 55, is a sketch, in plan and elevation, of 
 the crossing of two lines of communication, at different levels, 
 and at an acute angle. The lower one, rr, passes, by an oblique 
 arch, flanked by wing-walls, AC and BCj, through the embank¬ 
 ment, MM, which supports the upper line. The axis, parallel 
 to rn, of the arch, makes an angle, C nr, with the direction, 
 CCj, of the embankment through which the arch runs. 
 
 This understood, it is determined that the wing-walls shall 
 extend a given distance in front of CC l5 without being as far 
 apart at A and 13 as they would be if wholly curved. They 
 are, therefore, in plan, made partly straight and partly curved, 
 with a quite small radius, as Oe. 
 
 The straight wall, containing one face of the arch, lies between 
 the vertical planes CO and CjO^ Then, if the face of the wall 
 slopes, that of the curved portion of each wing-wall will be a 
 segment of a cone having a vertical axis ; and the faces, both of 
 the arch-wall and of the straight part of the wing-wall, will 
 be tangent planes to this cone. All parts of the face of the 
 wall will thus have the same batter. 
 
 From the complete plan, it will be seen that if the straight 
 parts of the two wing-walls are to be parallel to the centre line 
 of the arch, and equidistant from it, the conical portions must 
 be unequal segments , and of unequal radii, the larger segment, 
 adjacent to C 1? having the less radius. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 85 
 
 Problem XIV. 
 
 The compound , or piano-conical wing-wall. 
 
 I. The Projections. 1°. Preliminaries. — PI. VIII., Fig. 56, 
 represents the plan and elevation of a wing-wall, similar to that 
 part of Fig. 55 which is to the left of CO ; but with the ad 
 dition of a pier at the foot of the wall, and a coping ; also, the 
 plane V? instead of being taken as in Fig. 55, parallel to CCj, 
 is parallel to a plane, as OC, perpendicular to CCj. 
 
 Let the vertical line at O be the axis of the inverted cone of 
 revolution, a part of whose convex surface is the face of the 
 conical part of the wall. 
 
 The circle with radius, OA, of four feet, is the horizontal 
 trace of this cone, and the arc AG, of 60°, is that of the conical 
 portion of the wall. The tangents to AG at A and G are re¬ 
 spectively the horizontal traces of the planes of the faces of the 
 arch-wall, and of the straight portion of the wing-wall; which 
 are respectively tangent to the conical part, along the elements 
 whose horizontal projections are VB and VGT. Let the height 
 of the wall under the coping be 6 ft. 4 in. = 76 ins. and the 
 batter, The horizontal, AB, of the batter is, then, 19 ins. ; 
 and, making BC, the thickness of the wall at top, 2 ft., we 
 reach, at C, the back of the wall. 
 
 2°. Outlines of the elevation. — We must now turn to the 
 elevation, and make D'C' = 6 ft. 4 ins. ; draw C'B' parallel to 
 the ground line RD', and project A at A’ and B at W. Then 
 A'B'C'D' is the section of the wing-wall at its junction with 
 the arch-wall, in the vertical plane OC. Hence V', the vertical 
 projection of the vertex of the conical portion of the face of 
 the wall, is found by producing the element BA—B'A', parallel 
 to V, till it meets the axis O'O. 
 
 The section of the coping, in the vertical plane OC, is 
 C'E'F'H'; 8 inches thick by 2 ft. 3 inches wide. 
 
 Next, suppose the plane slope, QC, of the embankment, 
 behind the wing-wall, to be one of 1^ to 1, and to contain the 
 back top edge, CjC—C', of the arch-wall. Accordingly, make 
 D'Q = f D'C', then, as the plane of the slope of the em¬ 
 bankment is perpendicular to the plane OC, Figs. 55 and 56, its 
 horizontal trace, as AB, Fig. 55, PQ, Fig. 56, is parallel to CC^ 
 Hence PQC', Fig. 56, is the plane of this slope. 
 
86 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 3°. Conditions for the design of the top of the wall. — Let 
 these be three, as follows : — 
 
 ls£. Its front and back edges shall be plane curves ; sections 
 of the front and back surfaces of the wall. 
 
 2d. It shall be of uniform width, as seen in horizontal pro¬ 
 jection. 
 
 3 d. Its straight elements shall be horizontal. 
 
 Let the plane SRB', parallel to PQC', be that of the front 
 top edge, whose vertical projection is therefore in RB'. To 
 find its horizontal projection, aTB, proceed as in Des. Geom., 
 Prob. LVII. Thus, projecting G at G\ gives YGT—Y'G'T' 
 as one of the limiting elements of the conical face of the wall, 
 and T', its intersection with RB', is the vertical projection of a 
 point of the required edge, whose horizontal projection, T, is 
 therefore the projection of T' upon VG produced. In like 
 manner, any other points can be found. The frcrnt upper edge, 
 TB-T'B', of the conical part, is an elliptical arc, whose horizon¬ 
 tal projection, TB, is also elliptical, but in this case so slightly 
 so, that it may be represented, without sensible error, by a 
 circular arc whose centre, A, on OA, may be found by trial. 
 
 The front edge, aT, of the straight portion of the wall, is 
 tangent at TT' to TB—T'B', it being the intersection of the 
 tangent plane, GS, to the conical part, along the element GT, 
 with the plane, SRB', of the top edge. Hence (Des. Geom. 
 172) S is a point of this tangent, which is therefore projected 
 in ST—R'T'. 
 
 Supposing the wall to be terminated at a', at a height,//", 
 of 20 ins. from the ground; project a' upon ST at a, make 
 af= BC = 2 ft., by condition 2°; project/ upon the horizontal 
 a'f at/, and/C' will be the vertical projection of the hack top 
 edge of the wall , by condition 1°. By condition 2°, draw CK 
 with centre k (in general, a curve at a constant normal distance 
 from BT), and limited by AK, and Iv/ will be parallel to aT. 
 
 Now, by condition 3°, draw T'h' parallel to the ground line, 
 till it meets fC' at h' ; project h' at h upon the curve KC, and 
 TA—T'A' will be one element of the top of the wall. Again : 
 project K at K", draw K "V, project V (which is on a' B') at l on 
 aT ; and K l —K !'l' will be another element of the top of the wall; 
 which, as can now be seen, consists of three different warped 
 surfaces, as follows. 
 
 By condition 3°, all have the plane H as their common plane 
 director. Then, — 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 87 
 
 lsf. K/—K "f and al-a'V, both being straight, are directrices 
 of aflK — a'fV K", which is thus a hyperbolic paraboloid (Des. 
 Geom. 278). 
 
 2c?. K h —K "h 1 being curved, while ?T— V T 7 is straight, these 
 are the directrices of a small conoidal portion, KAT?— Wh'T'l'. 
 (See 114, p. 92.) 
 
 3c?. TABC— T'h'WO is a warped surface without specific 
 name, of the kind having two directrices, TB—T'B' and 
 C h — Oh' and a plane director, which is H* 
 
 These surfaces are evidently tangent to each other along 
 K?—K"?' and TA—TO. 
 
 4°. The pier. — This is rectangular in plan,/?, being one side, 
 and perpendiculars to it at e and/, 3 ins., longer than ef, being 
 the adjacent sides; so that the coping stone, odg , of the pier 
 shall be a square of 2 ft. 6 ins., overhanging on three sides. The 
 top of this stone is finished as a square pyramid 8 ins. high. 
 
 The pier having no batter, project e at e' ; and the vertical 
 at e' is a corner of the pier, and e'a! is the intersection of its 
 back with the face of the wall. Project c? in the vertical at d', 
 for the corner of the pier ; and c in the vertical, c'c", for the 
 junction of the pier coping with the front of the wall coping ; 
 both being vertical surfaces. Then c'F', and the parallel through 
 H', are the upper and lower front edges of the wall coping. 
 
 Coping edges. — F Lc — c" H 7 , being the intersection of the 
 warped top surface of the wall, produced, by a vertical plane and 
 cylinder, whose combined horizontal trace is FLc, is not strictly 
 a plane curve; but it is so near to the plane curve, BTa—B'a', 
 that it may be considered as one without sensible error ; espe¬ 
 cially in practical cases, where OA would be several times 4 
 ft., and hence the changes of form of all the curved surfaces 
 much less quick. F'LV would be strictly constructed by pro¬ 
 jecting points of FLc upon the vertical projections of the same 
 horizontal elements, K?— WV, etc., on which they were taken. 
 The other edges of the coping are FLc—FV and CKf — Of". 
 
 5°. The wall joints. — In the. face of the wall, the coursing 
 joints of the conical part are horizontal circles, as b'r 1 ; right 
 sections of this portion. Those of the straight part are parallel 
 to Ge. The heading joints are elements of the conic portion, 
 and parallel to GT on the straight portion. 
 
 The bed surfaces. — To avoid acute-angled edges of stones by 
 making adjacent surfaces mutually perpendicular, the bed sur- 
 
88 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 faces, that is, those extending from AG, br , etc., to the back 
 of the wall, may be formed in two ways. 
 
 First. If two lines, as V'B' and v'j'j", perpendicular to each 
 other, as aty 7 , revolve about the common vertical axis Y—VV, 
 which they both intersect, V'B 7 will generate the conical front 
 of the wall; v'j'j" will generate a conic bed surface, whose 
 vertex is Yv’, and everywhere normal to the conical front of 
 the wall, and jj' will describe the horizontal circle, jp — j'p r , 
 intersection of these two cones, as desired for a coursing joint. 
 With like results, revolve b'b", and the other parallels to v'j", 
 about the same axis, Y—VV. 
 
 Second. If VV 7 be made the centre of a series of spheres, of 
 radii Y'A', Y'b', Yj', etc., each of them will be normal to the 
 conical face of the wall, at their intersections with it, since the 
 elements of the wall are radii of the spheres; also they will 
 intersect the conic face in horizontal circles, as before. 
 
 Preferring the former system as simpler, let the beds of the 
 stones of the conic wall be conic surfaces generated by v'j'j", 
 etc., and let the ends of the stones be in vertical planes, VB, 
 VI, etc., radiating from the axis Y-Y'v' of the conical wall. 
 
 Thus, sqrpJJ and s'q'r'p'VJ'XJ'W are the complete projec¬ 
 tions of one stone of the conical wall. 
 
 The beds of the stones in the straight wall are planes, tan¬ 
 gent, as on r'W' and p’ J 7 , to the conical beds in the conical 
 wall. Their beads are in vertical planes parallel to VGT. 
 
 The coping joints. — These simply divide the top of the 
 coping suitably, so as to break joints with the upper stones 
 of the wall, and are in vertical places through the horizontal 
 straight elements KL — K'L', MN — M'N 7 , etc., of the top of 
 the coping. 
 
 Thus, MN — M'N'P'Q', LK — L'K'K"L", etc., are vertical 
 joint surfaces of the coping. 
 
 6°. Location and limitation of the face joints. — It is desirable 
 that a coursing joint should coincide with the top of the pier, 
 but not always convenient to make a suitable common divisor 
 of the heights of the pier and wall ; hence arises the problem: 
 to arrange the stones in courses of diminishing thickness up¬ 
 wards, and so that a conrsing joint shall coincide with the top 
 of the pier. Now parallel lines will be divided proportionally 
 by lines which meet at a point, P ; hence, if the latter lines 
 divide a given line, A, equally, they will divide a line, B, not 
 parallel to A, unequally. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 89 
 
 Hence, choosing in this example five courses of stones, as¬ 
 sume any point as a' on the level a'b' of the pier, drop a per¬ 
 pendicular B'B" from B', and draw a'B' and a'B". This done, 
 adjust any convenient edge scale of equal parts, by trial, till 
 the 0 of the scale being placed on a'B", the point 1 of the scale 
 shall fall on a'b', and 5 of the scale on a'B'. Holding the scale 
 in this position, prick off the other points of division from 0 to 
 5 upon the paper, and draw lines from a' through the points so 
 found, to meet B'B", as at y , etc. Then, through y , etc., 
 draw the horizontal joints. 
 
 To avoid acute intersections of the coursing joints, q'p', etc., 
 with the top edge, a'B', of the wall, the former must, as shown, 
 terminate on convenient heading joints, as b'a' on u'x', q'p' on 
 G'T', etc. 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments. These, besides Nos. 1 and 
 2, as in all other problems, are as follows : — 
 
 No. 3, a bevel, set to the diedral angle made by the slant 
 height of the pyramid, odg, with the vertical surfaces of the 
 pier coping. This angle is here shown by revolving the verti¬ 
 cal plane of this bevel till horizontal, as at o"f x a. 
 
 No. 4 is a pattern of each face, as odg, of the pyramid, found 
 by revolving it about dg till horizontal, giving o’"dg, where 
 o"'A = o' a. 
 
 No. 5 is the twisting frame for working the top of the coping 
 of the straight wall. It consists of two rulers framed together 
 so as to be in parallel planes, and so as to give the relative 
 position of the edges, as Z c — Z'c' and Yf — Y f", of the front 
 and back of this coping. These rulers are shown in their real 
 relative position, in the separate figure (No. 5), by making c3 
 and c2 horizontal and equal respectively to cZ and/Y on the 
 plan ; and then Sz and 2Y, perpendicular to c3 and c2, and 
 respectively equal to 3Z' and 2Y' on the elevation. The per¬ 
 pendicular distance of the rule cYY" behind czz" is af; so that 
 the former applies to the edge Yf — Yf" of the stone, while 
 the latter applies to Z c — Z'c'. 
 
 A similar frame can be made for the next stone, YL, of the 
 coping. 
 
 No. 6 is an elliptical templet fitted to the front top edge of 
 the conic wall. It is found simply by revolving the elliptic 
 arc, BT — B'T', around its transverse axis, BO — B'a', till 
 
90 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 parallel to the plane \f, 'when ordinates, as N^N^ to this axis, 
 will appear as at n'" N 2 , perpendicular to a' IV, and in their 
 real size, since is horizontal, and therefore seen in its 
 
 real size. 
 
 No. 7, not shown, is similar to No. 6, and similarly found, 
 and shows the real form of the curves, as FL 7 — F'Lj, of 
 the front of the coping, assumed as plane curves because so 
 near to B'T' (4°). Hence, the ordinates for finding No. 7 will 
 be laid off on perpendiculars to FV, and equal to their hori¬ 
 zontal projections, which are perpendiculars from FL X to BO. 
 
 No. 8, the dip bevel , shows the inclination of the elements, 
 b'b", etc., of the conical beds of the stones to the horizontal 
 plane. 
 
 No. 9, the coursing joint templet , is one of a set, one for 
 each coursing joint being evidently required by the increasing 
 radii of the latter. Its acting edge, ism , is cut to the circular 
 arc of a coursing joint. 
 
 No. 10 is flexible, and gives the relative position of a radial 
 joint, as j"j', and a coursing joint, as j'p' ; and hence, when 
 laid flat, gives the angle between an element and an arc of the 
 developed right section of a bed cone. 
 
 There is thus one for each bed, applicable to the two conic 
 surfaces, top of one stone and bottom of the next above it, 
 which unite on that bed. 
 
 Thus, in the one shown, the curved edge of radius v'j' is an 
 arc of the development of the horizontal circular section, jp — 
 j'p', of the bed cone whose vertex is v', while its straight 
 edge coincides with 0/ — v'j', produced. 
 
 No. 11 shows in like manner the relative position of a head¬ 
 ing and a coursing face joint, as s'q' and p'cf ; hence, when laid 
 flat, its curved edge, in the example shown, is drawn with the 
 radius Y'j', slant height of the face cone to p'j', as a base or 
 right section, while its straight arm coincides with the ele¬ 
 ment Y'j'. 
 
 No. 12 is a twisting frame for the curved portion of the 
 coping. It consists of three or more rulers, framed together, 
 each in a vertical plane, and so that their acting edges have 
 the relative position of three or more elements, as at X7 —7'; 
 LjKi — LjKj, and LK — UK', of the top of the coping. 
 
 No. 13, used in connection with No. 8, as indicated, gives 
 the vertical joints, as UL", of the front of the coping. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 91 
 
 No. 14, a bevel between the bed and back of a stone, serves 
 to keep these surfaces in their proper relative position, so far 
 as the back, being exposed, is wrought. 
 
 III. The Application. This, so far as not already sufficiently 
 understood from the description of the directing instruments, 
 can be sufficiently illustrated in the working of a stone from 
 the body of the conical wall, and of the top of the wall as a 
 whole. 
 
 Take for illustration the stone rspqlJ — r's’p'q' IPJ'; but as 
 it is obscurely represented in the general projections, see Fig. 
 57, an oblique projection of it, which explains itself by letter¬ 
 ing like points with the same letters as in Fig. 56. 
 
 As in all other cases, points, as ii, not in the edges or faces 
 of the auxiliary circumscribing rectangular prism r x ur 3 — r 2 UT", 
 are found by one or more ordinates, perpendicular to those 
 faces, and to each other; and hence seen in their real size in 
 Fig. 57, where all parallels to r x r 3 , rip", and r x u, are shown in 
 their real size. 
 
 Thus, in the two figures r x i 2 = r x i 2 ; i,i l = i 2 i x (plan) and if 
 = if (elevation). 
 
 Having then chosen a rough block capable of containing 
 the finished stone, proceed as follows : — 
 
 1°. Work a portion as mm x nn x of its upper surface to a plane, 
 and on this temporary plane portion (sometimes called a sur¬ 
 face of operation) mark the circular front edge, pq, by No. 9. 
 
 2°. By No. 8, having its straight arm in the temporary 
 plane, mpnq , and radial to the curve, as shown, form any num¬ 
 ber of elements of the conical top, pJlq, of the stone ; and 
 gauge the thicknesses, as ql, etc., on these elements, Fig. 56, 
 which will give the back edge, IJ, of the stone. 
 
 8°. By No. 10, placed as shown, mark the radial edges, qi 
 and y>J, of the ends of the stone. 
 
 4°. Work the conical front, square with the top, by No. 2, 
 the square, as shown, placing its arms to coincide with elements 
 of both surfaces, and mark the vertical joints, sq and rp , by 
 No. 11, placed as shown. 
 
 5°. The bottom edge, rs, is equidistant from pq , measured 
 on elements, or it may be marked by one of the set No. 9, or 
 by one of No. 11, or yet again by No. 15 (not shown, but 
 readily found) the development of the entire front face, rspq — 
 
92 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 r's'p'q' considered as on the convex surface of the cone, VV f , 
 of the face of the conical wall. 
 
 6°. The ends are wrought simply by the straight-edge, from 
 their edges, already found, as directrices. The bottom bed is 
 square with the front, and also tested by the suitable form of 
 the set, No. 10. 
 
 7°. The top of the wall. — Having finished the body of the 
 wall, except the top, its front edge, BTa— B 'a', can be imme¬ 
 diately located by measuring on the heading joints, from any 
 one coursing joint, as a'b ', or from a firm platform built at any 
 suitable level, as a horizontal reference plane. Having thus 
 the edge, B r a r , as a directrix, any number of level chisel lines 
 can be cut in the top of the wall, by the aid of a spirit-level, 
 till the top of the wall is finished. 
 
 Then, having wrought the top of the coping , by the forms of 
 Nos. 5 and 12, suited to each stone, gauge the coping every¬ 
 where of a uniform vertical thickness, which may be done by 
 forms of No. 13, suited to different positions along FLc. The 
 under surface may then be wrought, either by suitable forms of 
 Nos. 5 and 12, or even by No. 1 only. 
 
 When material and labor are cheap enough, the somewhat 
 difficult stones of the coping of the conical wall might be 
 wrought by the method of squaring (105) from a completely 
 finished circumscribing rectangular prism. 
 
 Examples.— 1. Construct a front elevation of the wing-wall. 
 
 2. Construct an isometric drawing of a stone from the body of the conic ■wall. 
 
 3. Construct an isometric view, and an oblique projection of a coping stone, to 
 illustrate the cutting of it by squaring. 
 
 4. Work out the entire problem for the opposite wing-wall, CiB, Fig. 55. 
 
 5. Work out the problem of the vertical quarter cylindrical wing-wall with a 
 right helicoidal top (whose elements will therefore be horizontal). 
 
 The Conoid. 
 
 114. The conoid is a warped surface, which is generated by 
 a straight line which moves upon a straight line and a curve 
 as directrices , and always parallel to a given plane, called its 
 plane-director. 
 
 In its simplest form, partly shown in PI. VIII., Fig. 58, 
 which is an oblique projection, the directrices are a straight 
 line, OF, and a circle as that on AC, both perpendicular to the 
 plane director, RCO, the plane, FOQ, being also perpendicular 
 to that of the circle. The plane RCO is Hi and RBC is V* 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 93 
 
 115. Elliptic sections. — Every plane section parallel to 
 ABC is an ellipse. Let atb indicate such a section. Since 
 te = dq, and TE = DQ, we have from this, and the triangle 
 OAQ, TE : AQ : : te : aq, which expresses a property of two 
 ellipses having an axis in each, equal. Hence atb is an ellipse. 
 
 116. Tangents. — If a line moves upon three fixed lines, it 
 can have but one position at each point of any one of these 
 lines. But a hyperbolic paraboloid consists of two sets of ele¬ 
 ments, all those of each set parallel to one plane, and each 
 element of each set intersecting all; and hence, any three of 
 the other set. Hence, if we take any three lines, as RK, rk, 
 and OF, tangent at points on the same element, as TH, of the 
 conoid, and parallel to one plane, \/, they will be elements of 
 one generation of a hyperbolic paraboloid, whose other genera¬ 
 tion is formed by moving TH, upon these tangents. TH being 
 parallel to H, will remain so, and hence RrO is one of its posi 
 tions, and KF another. That is KQ=FO. Thus RTKFHO 
 is a hyperbolic paraboloid, tangent to the conoid along TH, 
 and having H and V for the plane directors of its two genera¬ 
 tions. 
 
 117. Normal surface. — But as we could, in the last article, 
 have taken any other tangent at T, and parallels to it at all 
 points of TH, there may be an indefinite number of tangent hy¬ 
 perbolic paraboloids along TH. Of these, one will contain all 
 those tangents which are perpendicular to TH. Now, let all 
 these latter tangents be revolved 90°, about TH as an axis, and 
 they will all become normals to the conoid on TH. But as they 
 do not thus change their position relative to each other, they will 
 still form a hyperbolic paraboloid, which is thus the normal sur¬ 
 face along a given element. 
 
 118. General conclusion. — No distinctive property of the co¬ 
 noid, but only those of the hyperbolic paraboloid, having been 
 employed in this demonstration, this shows that the result is gen¬ 
 eral ; viz., that the normal surface to any warped surface at a 
 given element, is a hyperbolic paraboloid. 
 
94 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 Problem XV. 
 
 The conoidal wing-wall. 
 
 I. The Projections. — This novel form of wing-wall is 
 founded in the idea, that, at the foot, FC, of the -wall, where 
 the pressure of earth from behind is slight, no batter would be 
 necessary to give increased stability by increased thickness at 
 the base ; while, on the other hand, at AB — A'B( where the 
 height is greatest, the need o' a slope or batter to the front 
 would also be greatest. 
 
 1°. To fulfill these conditions, let the face of the wall be a 
 quarter of a right conoid having the quadrant EF — E'F' for 
 its curved direction ; the perpendicular, OF — O', to the plane 
 V, for its straight directrix (O' being the intersection of FO 
 with B'E', produced, where B'E' has a slope of 3 to 10), and the 
 plane V for its plane director. 
 
 Hence, divide E/aF, a quadrant of 9 ft. radius, into any 
 convenient number of parts, and OE, O ig, 0 2 7a, etc., drawn 
 through the points of division, and parallel to the ground-linE 
 D'F', will be the horizontal projection of elements of the co¬ 
 noidal face of the wall. 
 
 2°. The vertical projections of these elements will be found 
 by projecting E at E', g at g', etc., and drawing E'O' with a 
 batter, JL'b ! , of 3 to 10, then g’ O', etc. But, in this figure, O' 
 is thus made inaccessible ; hence proceed as follows : — 
 
 Draw A'B' at the intended height, 10 ft., of the wall, and 
 produce it as the vertical trace, A'e', of a horizontal plane, in 
 which is the quadrant B ae, whose centre is O. Divide this 
 quadrant in the same manner as EF, as at a, c , etc., project a, 
 c, etc., at a', c ', etc., and as a'g 1 , c'h ', etc., necessarily pass 
 through O' (being identical with the vertical projections of the 
 elements of a cone whose vertex is 00', and base E/aF) they 
 are the vertical projections of the element of the conoid. 
 
 3°. The front top edge , BXF — B'C', is assumed to be the 
 intersection of the conoidal front-face of the wall with a plane, 
 parallel to the straight directrix OF, and having a slope of 3 
 to 2. BF is then found by projecting down B', y\ X', etc., 
 intersections of B'C' with given elements, upon the horizontal 
 projections of the same elements, as at B, y, X, etc. 
 
 The hack of the wall , made of the given top thickness AB, 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 95 
 
 may then be made concentric with BF, as seen in plan, by 
 making it tangent to any sufficient number of arcs, of radius 
 AB, and with their centres on BXF. 
 
 The top edge of the back is here assumed to be the intersec¬ 
 tion of the vertical cylindrical surface of the back, with a plane 
 perpendicular to V ? and whose vertical trace is A'C'. 
 
 The top surface of the wall will thus naturally be a warped 
 surface, having BF — B'F' and AC — A'C' for directrices, 
 and H for its plane director. 
 
 The face-joints. —These shall be the elements just found, 
 for the heading joints; while the coursing joints shall be equi¬ 
 distant horizontal sections, mF — w! T', etc., which (115) are 
 ellipses. 
 
 The joint surfaces. — With the quick curvatures arising from 
 small dimensions and large batter, as in the present example, 
 these surfaces should be normal to the face of the wall along 
 the lines just fixed upon as the joints of the face. 
 
 The coursing surfaces , or beds , will thus be warped surfaces, 
 which, for the joint mF — m'T', for example, will be generated 
 by a line mA — m'B", normal to EB — E'B', and moving 
 upon wzF — m'T! as a directrix, so as to continue normal to the 
 face of the wall. Now, since there can be but one tangent 
 plane at any one point of a surface, and but one perpendicular 
 to a plane at any one point, there can be but one normal line 
 to a surface at any one point; hence, the warped surface thus 
 generated is determinate. 
 
 The heading surfaces will be the normal hyperbolic para¬ 
 boloids along the elements of the conoid (117). 
 
 5°. Construction of the joint surfaces. — If two lines are 
 perpendicular to each other, and one of them be parallel to a 
 plane of projection, their projections on that plane will be 
 perpendicular to each other. Now the elements , as lu — Vu\ 
 of the conoid, are parallel to V ; hence, the vertical projections, 
 rV, n'q' , etc., of the normals to the conoid, along lu — Vu 
 will be perpendicular to l'u'. And the like is true for the 
 other elements. Again, the normals at points of the ellipses 
 mF, etc., are perpendicular to the tangents to those ellipses at 
 the same points ; hence, rs , nq , etc., oQ, etc., are perpendicular 
 to the tangents at r, w, o , etc., respectively, to the ellipses 
 HrF, wwF, etc. 
 
 Projecting A, Q, R, etc., upon the vertical projections, 
 
96 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 m'W ! , o r Q r , k'R', etc., normals at m r , o’, lc f , etc., we Lave 
 .... T', tangent to w! T' at C,T', for the vertical 
 projection of a coursing joint on the back of the wall; and 
 raAFC — as the normal coursing surface contain¬ 
 
 ing the ellipse mF — m’F’. 
 
 Likewise, projecting p, q , s, etc., upon the perpendiculars to 
 Vu l at V , n’, r etc., we find p’q’t r , a heading joint, upon the 
 back of the wall. 
 
 6°. The tangents at o, n , r, etc., to the ellipses wF, etc., and 
 to which the normals oQ, etc., are made perpendicular, may be 
 drawn in various ways, as most convenient for each point. 
 
 1$Z. That at zz\ to the ellipse wF, is here drawn by the 
 method of bisecting the angle MzN included by lines from z to 
 the foci, one of which, f, is shown, and both of which are at 
 the intersections of an arc with radius Ora, and centre F, with 
 the transverse axis mO ; produced to find the other focus f. 
 
 2 d. That at n, to the same ellipse, is drawn by the method 
 of revolution ; the quadrant, EF, being the projection of raF 
 after a certain revolution about OF. Then n appears at Z, and 
 IG is the revolved position of the required tangent, which, by 
 counter-revolution, appears at Gn. 
 
 8 d. The tangent, Jr, is likewise found from JZ, where the 
 revolution of the ellipse, HF, take place about HO, till it ap¬ 
 pears as a circle of radius OH. 
 
 4 th. If adjacent figures were not in the way, so that other 
 quadrants of each ellipse could be shown, we might proceed as 
 follows, by the method of conjugate diameters. Thus, at o, 
 for example, draw Oo and any chord , parallel to it, and the 
 tangent at o to moF would then be parallel to the line from O 
 to the middle point of this chord, for such line would be the 
 diameter conjugate to Oo. 
 
 7°. Approximate joint surfaces. —With the considerably 
 larger dimensions, and less declivity of face, which would be 
 generally found in practice, the part from X to F would be 
 nearly a vertical plane, and from BE to X, nearly a conical, 
 or even an almost vertical cylindrical surface. Hence, in such 
 a case the coursing surfaces could be safely horizontal planes ; 
 and the heading surfaces could be planes. That through the 
 element lu — l'u', for example, might be a plane, determined 
 by the element together with the horizontal element, at K , of 
 the top surface. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 97 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments and their Application. As 
 every surface, except the back, which would generally be left 
 rough, of all the stones between UU 7 and gg' is warped, no 
 patterns can be used. It would therefore be best to begin , at 
 least, by working some one surface by the method of squaring 
 (105) from the sides of a circumscribing prism, so far finished 
 as to admit of the application of this method. 
 
 Having the front, for example, thus wrought, beds could be 
 made square with it by keeping one arm of the square (No. 2) 
 on an element of the front, and the other on an element of the 
 bed. 
 
 With the often admissible approximate plane joints, already 
 described, the operations would be much easier, as patterns of 
 all the faces except the conoidal front could be easily found 
 and applied. 
 
 These general guiding observations, added to previous exam¬ 
 ples, will enable the student to construct whatever instruments 
 may be necessary. 
 
 Examples. = 1°. Construct the front elevation of this wall, and an isometric, 
 or oblique projection of one of its stones. 
 
 2°. Construct the wall when OE is less than OF. 
 
 STAIRS. 
 
 119. Stairs vary in form ; first, as a whole , depending on 
 the form of the space which they occupy ; second, in detail , 
 that is, in the form and arrangement of the separate steps. 
 
 Certain practical conditions and geometrical principles are, 
 however, common to all cases ; hence, a single example of a 
 general case, fully explained, will serve as a standard, from 
 which variations may be made to any particular forms. 
 
 120. General Geometrical Principles. — All stairs may be 
 divided into two principal kinds. 
 
 1st. Straight stairs; in which the height, or rise , and the 
 width, or tread , are each uniform, on each and all of the steps. 
 
 2d. Winding stairs; in which the rise remains uniform, 
 while the tread is variable at different points of each step. 
 In this sense, winding stairs which consist only of successive 
 short flights of straight stairs running in different directions, 
 are not included. 
 
 7 
 
98 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 121. Winding stairs are, again, of two species : — 
 
 First, those which wind around a single vertical axis from 
 which the edges of the steps radiate. 
 
 Second, those which radiate around no single central axis 
 from which the steps radiate. 
 
 In the former, the tread is uniform on a line of ascent taken 
 at any given distance from the axis. In the latter, there is 
 but one such line, and it is taken at that distance from the 
 hand-rail which any one would naturally choose in passing 
 up or down the stairs, and may be called the line of passage. 
 
 Stairs mostly straight are often partly winding, at one or 
 both ends, and will then be classed under one or the other of 
 the varieties just indicated. 
 
 122. In winding stairs of the first species, the natural line 
 of passage upon them is obviously a common or circular helix , 
 as in PI. VII., Fig. 50; where, if a horizontal and a vertical 
 plane be passed through each element, they would evidently 
 intersect each other so as to form the steps of such stairs as 
 would wind around the axis of a cylindrical pit. 
 
 In winding stairs of the second species, the horizontal projec¬ 
 tion of the line of passage will not be a circle as in PI. VII., 
 Fig. 50, but some other curve, as LP, Fig. 8, better conformed 
 to the ground area covered by the stairs. 
 
 123. Now let LP, Fig. 8, be the horizontal trace of a verti¬ 
 
 cal cylinder, on which a point, m , moves so that the horizontal 
 and vertical components of its motion are equal, that is, so that 
 if mm x = etc., the heights of m l above m; of m 2 above 
 
 etc., will be equal. The point m will thus generate a helix , A, 
 but of a more general kind than the circular helix, PI. VII., 
 Fig. 50. 
 
 124. Also if a horizontal straight line taken as a generatrix 
 G, move upon this new helix LP, in the same manner as in 
 PI. VII., Fig. 50, the resulting surface will still be a helicoid, H, 
 but of a more general form than the usual particular form shown 
 in that figure. 
 
 But as the plan, LP, of h is no longer a circle, while the line 
 G continues perpendicular to it as seen in plan, Fig. 8, the lines 
 g, g^g-i'i etc., horizontal projections of successive positions of G, 
 will not pass through any one point, as at o in PI. VII., Fig. 
 50, but will intersect each other, as in Fig. 8, so that when 
 g, g-ii . g n i and thence their intersections, p, q , r, etc.. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 99 
 
 become consecutive, p, q, r, . r n , will form a curve to 
 
 which g, g v g 2 , g n .will be tangent. 
 
 125.. We thus reach the following important conclusions 4 , 
 foundation of the design of stairs of every form. 
 
 1°. The curve pqr is the horizontal projection of a vertical 
 cylinder , C, which replaces the vertical straight line (axis) o — 
 012' in PI. VII., Fig. 50. 
 
 2°. The curve LP is the horizontal projection of a general 
 form of a helix, A, (123). 
 
 3°. The straight line g, then moves upon the helix A, and 
 remains horizontal and tangent to the cylinder C. It thus gen¬ 
 erates a general form of helicoidal surface, H; such as forms 
 the under surface of the stairs, and such as will contain the 
 similar radial edges of all the steps. 
 
 Problem XVI. 
 
 Winding stairs on an irregular ground plan. 
 
 I. The Projections. Let a landing at AdE, PI. VIII., Fig. 
 60, provided for a door in the wall ES, be connected with a 
 floor three feet higher at CH, by a flight of five steps, counting 
 the upper level. And let these steps be built three inches into 
 the wall, whose base is the segment HGFE of an irregular 
 polygon. 
 
100 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 Let the line of passage (121) be tlie arc CD of the ellipse, 
 whose semi-axes, OA, and OB, are determined by convenience. 
 
 The tread of each step, measured from D on AC, is 12 ins. 
 giving I, J, K, C. At these points draw normals to the ellipse, 
 AC, as Dff, etc., which will be edges of steps. On these nor¬ 
 mals lay off 18 ins. inward from CD, to locate the inner end, 
 cff, of the steps, or the circumference of the well , as it is 
 called. 
 
 For firmer support , let each step extend as at Ky, or J k 
 (J 2 &,) and K^, 7 ins. under the next upper one ; and then 
 normals to CD at k and g, will be the under edges of the step 
 JK, and, see k 2 and g 2 , in the general under surface of the steps. 
 
 This under surface of the steps is a right helicoid, LI, gen¬ 
 erated by Q icq moving upon a helix whose horizontal pro¬ 
 jection is CD, normal to it, and parallel to H as its plane 
 director. 
 
 Normal joints. — These, perpendicular on Q q, etc., toffhe 
 helicoid, H, should (by 118) be hyperbolic paraboloids. But 
 it is a sufficient approximation to make them normal planes at 
 some suitable mean point. They are here made normal at g , 
 k , etc., points on the helix CD, for two principal reasons. 1st. 
 Only the helix CD will be straight in development, it alone 
 having equal arcs for equal ascents (123). Hence, normals at 
 its points can be more easily drawn. 2d. All the curvatures 
 are quicker within than without CD ; hence the warped, and 
 plane normal surfaces, will differ less if the normals be nearer 
 cd than to the wall. 
 
 The development. —Proceeding as just indicated, make C 2 D a 
 = CD, and CgCj = the total rise = 3 ft. and CiDiWill be the 
 development of the helix over CD, and which cuts the front 
 edges of the steps. 
 
 Next, after dividing CiD x into four equal parts, make 
 \ C X C 2 ; J x Ki = JIv ; J 2 ki = J& ; = Kg ; and g x g 2 and k x 
 
 k 2 , each, for example equal to ^ JiJ 2 , when g 2 s x parallel to CjDj, 
 will be the development of that helix, projected in CD, which 
 is in the helicoid H. 
 
 Finally, at g 2 , k 2 , etc., draw g 2 fi , k 2 h^ etc., perpendicular to 
 CjDx, and they will be lines of the required normal planes to 
 H, at g , k , etc. Do the same for the other steps, and the figure 
 D^ifiJ! will be the complete development of the section of the 
 steps made by the vertical cylinder whose base is CD. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 101 
 
 Then, to complete the plan, make gf = kh = g x f^ etc., and 
 the lines as M hm, parallel to Q kq, etc., will be the traces of 
 the normal planes to H upon the treads. 
 
 II. The directing instruments , besides Nos. 1 and 2, are 
 these: — 
 
 No. 8, the pattern, ML ml, of the top of a step. 
 
 No. 4, the pattern, M'L'R', of the wall end of a step. This 
 is found by projecting the outer end, QL, of a step upon a par¬ 
 allel plane, as shown ; making all the vertical distances equal 
 to the like ones on the development; Q' = g x g 2 ; P'P X = 
 KiKj (greater than JiJ 2 , since is greater than k'k 2 ). 
 
 No. 5, the pattern, of the inner end of a step. This, 
 
 for the step E<2rR, is the development of its inner end. Then 
 rgii ; r^i; etc., equal rn, rl, rd , etc., on the plan ; and the 
 heights, l x l 2 , etc., equal those on the delopment KjK 2 , etc. 
 
 No. 6 is a normal joint bevel, giving the constant angle 
 
 J 2 h\k-2‘ 
 
 III. Application. — Having chosen a sufficient block, bring 
 its intended top to a plane, and mark its form by No. 3. 
 Work the rise and the end, square with the top, using Nos. 
 4 and 5 to give the forms of the ends. Work the normal 
 joints by No. 6, and the helicoidal under side by No. 1, ap¬ 
 plied on points transferred from the drawing, where elements 
 would meet ql and QL, for the step IJ, for example. 
 
 Other Forms of Stairs. 
 
 126. Other stairs are, for want of space, merely suggested bj 
 the steps, illustrated in Figs. 61, 62, which are both adapted to 
 circular stairs ; that is, those placed in a cylindrical case. They 
 are contrasted in the manner of support. In Fig. 61, which 
 shows a plan,, elevation of the back edges, and a development 
 of the cylindrical outer end BD, the central open cylinder, or 
 well, is filled by a core, composed of the cylindrical wings, or 
 ears, O, solid with the inner end of each step. The core is 
 sometimes larger, and then solid, and with the steps indented 
 into it, as at the outer ends in Fig. 60. 
 
 Fig. 62 is an oblique projection of one step of circular stair 
 with an open well; and the steps are supported by an ear CE 
 
102 
 
 STEREOTOM Y 
 
 at the outer end whose whole thickness, Fe, is indented into the 
 wall, giving them a wide horizontal support. 
 
 Examples. — 1°. Observing that the curves, CDA and XY, PI. VIII., Fig. 60, 
 have the relation of involute and evolute to each other, represent, with the pat¬ 
 terns, stairs in which XY shall be assumed. 
 
 2°. Stairs in which cd shall be assumed. 
 
 3°. Construct stairs whose steps shall be formed as indicated in Fig. 62. 
 
 4°. Construct circular stairs in a cylindrical case, with a central post formed of 
 steps like that of Fig. 61. 
 
 5°. In a flight of five, or more, steps against one reach of wall, as GF, Fig. 60, 
 construct the intersection of that wall with the helicoid, H, of the under surface of 
 
 the stairs. 
 
CLASS IV. 
 
 Structures containing Double-Curved Surfaces. 
 
 Problem XVII. 
 
 A trumpet bracket with basin and niche. 
 
 I. The Projections. These are a plan, RrE ; a front eleva¬ 
 tion A'B'E" ; and a sectional side elevation, 0"'R"E"". 
 
 1°. The outlines of the bracket. PL IX. Fig. 63, is a 
 
 wall of the general thickness QK; but, where the bracket is 
 attached, of the additional thickness, r^s. The front of the 
 bracket is composed of two cylindrical surfaces; one vertical, 
 with the radius OA; the other horizontal, with its elements, 
 AB, wa, etc., parallel to the ground line A'B'. 
 
 The form of the latter cylinder is made to depend on the 
 given curve, AEB — A'E'B', of their intersection, where A'E'B' 
 is a semicircle. This curve would be the intersection of the 
 vertical cylinder, with a cylinder of revolution whose vertical 
 projection would be A'E'B', as shown more clearly in the aux¬ 
 iliary Fig. 64, where AEB — A'E'B' is the intersection of the 
 vertical cylinder, CD — C'D', with the cylinder, UT — A'E'B', 
 which is perpendicular to the vertical plane. By Theorem I., 
 the projection, E'"0'", of the intersection AEB —A'E'B', on a 
 plane, as 0"'X, parallel to the plane, EF, of the axes of the cyl¬ 
 inders of revolution, is a hyperbola. The vertical cylinder is 
 then cut away to this hyperbolic profile, E'"0'"; so that the 
 face of the bracket within A'E'B' is a cylinder parallel to the 
 ground line and with a hyperbolic right section, or base O'E'— 
 0"'E'". 
 
 The top of the bracket is a plane annular surface, between 
 AEB —A"B" and the circular edge, of radius OH, of the hem¬ 
 ispherical basin, H'G'I' — J'G"J". 
 
 2°. The joints of the bracket. — Having found 0"'E'", as may 
 be seen by inspection, divide A'E'B' into equal parts, here five, 
 and draw the radial joints, as h! O'; dO', etc., limited, to avoid 
 thin edges, by a semi-cylindrical stone of radius UT— O'T', = 
 R'V". Then — 
 
104 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 To find intermediate points in the joints on the vertical cylin¬ 
 der. — Assume b' as such a point. Its horizontal projection is 
 b , and auxiliary projection b x , which by revolution appears at b", 
 intersection of b 2 b" and b'b". 
 
 To find intermediate points in the joints on the horizontal cyl¬ 
 inder. — Here it is the horizontal projection of the point that 
 needs construction. Assuming d’, for example, project it at 
 d", on O^'E', thence to sX. and revolve upon Xm; whence pro¬ 
 ject upon d'd at d. Or, by the method of transference , make 
 d x d = d"'d" (50). 
 
 By the same method, applied to b", make b'"b" = ob, to find 
 b". Also, make h"e"' = hli'", to find h". In similar ways the 
 points of all the joints of the bracket can be found; as at 
 e'"h'{ = h"%, in finding 7q, a point of the basin joint, h x gk 
 
 — h!g '— Kg<%'. 
 
 The horizontal projections, as hgjk, of the basin joints, above 
 gg' , on the vertical semicircle, H'G'P, of the basin, are found 
 by horizontal circles, as that with radius j'l', each of which will 
 contain four points of the two basin joints, of which points if 
 is one. 
 
 3°. The Niche. — The niche is a vertical semi-cylinder, CFD 
 
 — C'C^D'D", covered by the quarter sphere included between 
 the horizontal semicircle, CFD — C^D", and the vertical one, 
 CD — C^E^D". The joints of the spherical part are circular, 
 and in planes which radiate from the diameter, OF — O" — 
 0""F"; and are limited by the cylindrical stone, O^L'P". 
 
 Intermediate points of these joints, as N', are readily found 
 on the plan and side elevation, in various ways. Thus, MMj 
 
 — M'N'Mj — M"N" is a vertical circle through N', which point 
 
 is thence projected upon MMj at N, and upon at W. 
 
 This circle might have been made horizontal through N'; or 
 the plane of the joint might have been revolved about OK — 
 OHC as an axis, when the circular joint would have fallen on 
 K'E" and N 7 at n". Then make WjN = n"W, which will give 
 N, as before. 
 
 Varied constructions are useful, in case some one of them 
 does not conveniently apply to certain points. Points, as K', 
 being projected at Iv, and K", and U at L, and L", KNL and 
 K"N"L"are the other two projections of the circular joint K'L\ 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments. — These will consist of pat- 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 105 
 
 terns of the plane and developable faces of all the stones, with 
 a sufficient number of bevels to insure the correct relative po¬ 
 sitions of all the surfaces. 
 
 After the numerous preceding examples of developing the 
 convex surfaces of stones of irregular shape, the construction of 
 the required patterns can be made from the following general 
 directions. 
 
 Take the stone, A "h' Y'v't', of the bracket, and h'K r p' of the 
 niche, as being the most irregular ones. Let each extend to the 
 vertical plane back, Rr — R"Q", of the wall. Develop the 
 entire convex surface, both lateral and end faces, of each, as in 
 previous examples. The following, including the necessary 
 bevels, will thus be found. 
 
 No. 1, the straight edge. 
 
 No. 2, the square. Then for the bracket stone alone — 
 
 No. 3, the pattern of the back, = A" h'Y'v't'. 
 
 No. 4, that of the top, = A'"h 2 h^lh ] hA. 
 
 No. 5, that of the radial joint, hiYuh.^h^ghy — Y'h 1 . 
 
 No. 6, that of the opposite radial joint, AA ,n v x vn. 
 
 No. 7, that of the surface, Yvv x u. 
 
 No. 8, the development of the vertical cylindrical surface, 
 AM — A "h'i'tf. 
 
 No. 9, the development of the portion, nivY — n'i’v'Y' — i'f”, 
 of the horizontal hyperbolic cylinder of the front. 
 
 Nos. 10 and 11, as shown on the figure. 
 
 The corresponding guides for the niche stone can readily be 
 
 found. 
 
 To avoid the too acute angle at h x in the bracket stone, H'GT' 
 might have been an arc of 120° or less ; or the portion of the 
 bracket above E' might have been a single stone thick enough 
 to contain the basin. 
 
 III. The Application. This is, in the main, sufficiently ob¬ 
 vious, from the description of the patterns, and the previous 
 essentially similar cases. The back of both the bracket and 
 the niche stone may properly be wrought first, since all the lat¬ 
 eral faces are perpendicular to it. The order and manner of 
 using the remaining guides may be left to the workman. 
 
 Examples. — 1°. Construct the niche alone. 
 
 2 °. Construct the bracket alone, and without the basin. 
 
106 
 
 STEREOTOM Y. 
 
 Theorem III. 
 
 The conic section whose principal vertex and point of contact 
 with a known tangent are given, will he a parabola, ellipse , or 
 hyperbola; according as the given vertex bisects the sub¬ 
 tangent, or makes its greater segment without, or within, the 
 curve. 
 
 In both the ellipse and the hyperbola, referred to their cen¬ 
 tres and axes, the subtangent is a fourth proportional to the 
 abscissa of contact, and those segments of the transverse axis 
 which meet on the ordinate of contact. That is, in Figs. 9 
 and 10, CO :Oa:: OA : OT ; 
 
 whence, by division, CO : O a — CO :: OA : OT—OA • 
 or CO : CA :: OA : TA 
 
 
 —^ 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 o \ 
 
 o 1 
 
 Ia t 
 
 Now, always, in the ellipse, 
 
 • • 
 
 But in the hyperbola, 
 
 • • 
 
 In the parabola, 
 
 CA>CO 
 TA>OA 
 CA<CO 
 TA<OA. 
 AO = AT. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 107 
 
 Problem XVII. 
 
 The hooded portal. 
 
 The Projections. — PI. IX., Fig. 65. This construction is 
 known in France as the recessed gate of St. Anthony, it being 
 that gate near to the Bastile, which led to the suburb called St. 
 Anthony. The figure represents a broken plan and front ele¬ 
 vation , and a vertical section through the axis of the portal. 
 Its design is to give to a portal, closed by rectangular gates, 
 something of the grander effect of a semicircular topped portal, 
 closed by gates of like form, as in PL VI., Fig. 45. 
 
 Let AcFmVO be half of a horizontal section of the portal, 
 below its top, V'F'. Then, as in Problem XI., the entire 
 passage embraces three parts, of which one half of each is as 
 follows : the portal proper, EVwF; the gate recess, E c"ce ; 
 and the converging embrasure, OecA, flanked by the jambs, 
 one of which is Ac. 
 
 The tops of the two former parts are horizontal planes. The 
 latter is covered by the very peculiar double-curved surface , 
 characteristic of the structure, and generated by a variable 
 semi-ellipse ; which, starting from the semicircle of radius OA, 
 as its initial position, moves so that its centre shall remain on 
 Oe — O', one vertex upon Ac, and another upon a fixed ellipse, 
 C "p"e", whose axes are O — O'C and Oe — O'. Hence, this 
 elliptical generatrix varies from the semicircle of radius OA to 
 the straight line 2 ec. Thus, when this ellipse has reached the 
 plane ap, its semi-axes will be ap and O'/?', = qp". Likewise, 
 bf and Of are the semi-axes of another position of the movable 
 ellipse. 
 
 We may note in passing that, beginning at the vertical 
 plane OA, the horizontal axis will diminish more rapidly than 
 the vertical one, until we reach the point of contact of that 
 tangent to c"p"e", which makes the same angle with 0"D" 
 that Ac does with OA. Hence, as O'A'C' is a circle, a few 
 positions of the movable ellipse near it will have their longer 
 semi-axes vertical. 
 
 The joints, as L'J, in the vertical plane portion exterior to 
 the recess, are straight, and radial to the semicircle of ra¬ 
 dius O'A'. 
 
 The face joints, as L'M', within the recess, are best made 
 
108 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 normal to both of the limiting positions of the variable ellip* 
 tic generatrix. This result may be obtained by making these 
 joints, as seen in front elevation, as circular arcs, tangent, as at 
 L', to the radial joints, L/J, etc., just described, and with their 
 centres on O'A'. But such joints will divide 20 'c' unequally. 
 If the latter result be thought undesirable, 20the top line 
 of the gate recess, may be divided equally, as in the figure, and 
 the joints may be either conic sections or curves of two centres , 
 tangent, as at L', to the radial joints, and, as at M', to vertical 
 lines. 
 
 The construction is illustrated in the joint K'G', which 
 (Theor. III.) is elliptical, since the greater segment, K'O', of 
 the subtangent, O'o, is exterior to the curve. Bisecting the 
 chord G'K', and joining its middle point, n', with d', the inter¬ 
 section of the tangents at G' and K', we have, by a property of 
 the ellipse, d'n’ as a diameter ; which therefore meets the axis, 
 O'A'(and the opposite symmetrical diameter), at X, the centre 
 of the curve ; whence the shorter axis can be found from the 
 property of the subnormal, oS, expressed by the proportion, 
 
 Xo : oS : : a 2 : 6 2 , 
 
 where a is the semi-transverse axis, XK' ; and b, which equals 
 the semi-conjugate axis, = AB, Fig. 66, is found by the usual 
 construction from elementary geometry. 
 
 Examining the joints M'L'and P'Q', we find M'0'>M'A', 
 but P'O' < PV. Hence, by Theor. III., the joint M'L' 
 should be elliptical, and P'Q' hyperbolic; but the differences, 
 M'O' — M'/i' and P'O' — P'r', are so small, that they are here 
 made with sufficient accuracy as circular arcs, whose centres 
 are on O'X. 
 
 The horizontal projections of the joints are found by pro¬ 
 jecting down their intersections with the contours of the sur¬ 
 face, made by the vertical planes, pa and /A, as is fully shown 
 for the joint K'I'H'G'; whose horizontal projection is KIHG. 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments. — Most of these can be 
 sufficiently indicated by a description of the most irregular 
 stone of the structure; that whose vertical projection is 
 RY?/'F'K'G', and which is more clearly exhibited in the oblique 
 projection, Fig. 67, like points having like letters in both 
 figures. 
 
 The many surfaces of this stone are: — 
 
STONE-CU ITING. 
 
 109 
 
 1°. The vertical rectangular plane side, YyUYh 
 
 2°. The vertical plane back, Y'U&. 
 
 3°. The vertical plane front, GRYt/Z. 
 
 4°. The horizontal plane base, XJkK. n c' r zZy. 
 
 5°, 6°. The horizontal plane top, RYR'Y'; and small hori¬ 
 zontal plane surface, Kcc' K\ 
 
 7°, 8°, 9°, 10°. The four minor vertical plane faces, K f K'7c, 
 K'K'W, czc ", and AZz, respectively, in the portal, gate recess, 
 and jamb. 
 
 11°. The oblique plane surface, GRG'Rh 
 
 12°. The elliptic cylindrical surface, G'&'KHG. Fig. 68, is 
 the development of the like surface on M'L', joined with the 
 plane portion on L'J. 
 
 13°. The double-curved surface, AcKHG. 
 
 The last surface being non-developable, no pattern of it can 
 be made, but templets fitted to any of its vertical sections , 
 parallel to C"e ", or to f'b\ or to its horizontal sections, can be 
 made. 
 
 These templets, with patterns, easily made, of the other sur¬ 
 faces, and the square and straight edge, will be ample guides in 
 working this stone. 
 
 III. Application. — First form the surface, YY'Uy, it being 
 the largest and simplest; next the back; and then the base 
 and front, and all the other plane surfaces, each of which is 
 square with one or more of the others. 
 
 The cylindrical surface, GG'K&', may then be wrought 
 square with the back upon G 'Tc', as a given edge, or directrix, 
 previously found by the pattern of the back. Or it may be 
 wrought by templets fitted to the profile, R'G'F. Its edges 
 may then be scored on the stone by a pattern corresponding 
 to that of the cylindrical joint on M'L/, shown in Fig. 68. 
 
 These operations will give all the bounding edges of the 
 one remaining surface, which is double-curved. After approx¬ 
 imately hewing out this portion of each of the stones, they can 
 be accurately put in place, since all the other surfaces of each 
 will have been previously completed. The total double-curved 
 surface of the recess can then be wrought at once, by means of 
 the templets, last described in the list of guiding instruments. 
 
 Examples. — 1°. Construct the figure with two centred joints in the front 
 elevation. 
 
110 
 
 STEREOTOM Y. 
 
 2°. Make an isometrical or an oblique projection showing the under side of 
 the stone shown in Fig. 67. 
 
 3°. Make like projections of the stone M'JTR. 
 
 Problem XIX. 
 
 An oblique lunette in a spherical dome. 
 
 I. The Projections. — A lunette is formed by tbe intersection 
 of two arched spaces, both of stone, and of unequal heights, so 
 that the groin curves will be of double curvature. 
 
 1°. Arrangement of projections. — PL X., Fig. 69. These 
 are a plan, and two elevations, on two vertical planes, V and Vi» 
 at right angles to each other, and whose ground lines are respec¬ 
 tively O'X and 0"X. As in all similar cases, the projections 
 of any point on V and on Vu will then be at equal heights 
 above O'X and 0"X. 
 
 Given parts and dimensions. — In the plan, the circles, OA 
 of 11 ft. radius, and OH of 13': 6" radius, are the horizontal 
 traces of the interior and exterior surfaces of the dome. The 
 former is a hemisphere ; the latter, partly cylindrical, as indi¬ 
 cated in the section shown on the plane 0"X, is there gener¬ 
 ated by H'H", 6': 10" high. The radius, D"x, of the extrados, 
 is 16 ft., where # is 3 ft. below the centre, 0", of the intrados. 
 The elevation on O'X shows a right section of the arch, its 
 inner radius 4 ft., its outer one 8 ft., its thickness at the 
 crown 1': 6" ; and the perpendicular distance of its axis, o x o\ 
 from the diameter, HO, 6': 3". 
 
 From these data all the remaining constructions are made. 
 
 2°. The groin. — Any horizontal plane will cut a horizontal 
 circle from the sphere, and two elements from the arch, which 
 will meet that circle in two points of the groin. Thus, the 
 plane, a[m(m x v ), cuts from the sphere the circle of radius 
 Oa x (= vy') and from the arch the two elements, of which one 
 at a[, being projected on H, intersects circle O a^ at a x , as shown, 
 and thence gives its side elevation a x on vy. Other points 
 being found in the same manner, give the groin curve aca 6 — 
 a!da\ — a"c"a £. 
 
 3°. The horizontal projection of the groin is an arc of a 
 parabola. — To prove this, refer the intrados of the sphere and 
 cylinder to the three rectangular coordinate axes : OH u as the 
 axis of X; OH, as the axis of Y; and the vertical at O, as 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 Ill 
 
 the axis of Z. Then, neglecting the usual negative sign of or¬ 
 dinates to the left of the origin, O, as not relating to the form 
 of the line sought, we have for the point a x a\, for example, 
 
 (Ohy + (H ) 2 + (h'a\y = r 2 
 
 where R = the radius, OA, of the sphere. 
 
 That is x 2 -f- y 2 -j- z 2 = R 2 . (1) 
 
 And as the like is true for every point of the sphere, (1) is 
 called the equation of the sphere, referred to its centre. 
 
 Again, (o'A') 2 -j- ( h!a{f = ( o’af) 2 = r 2 . 
 
 That is, calling O'o'=a, 
 
 (a — xy -j- z 2 = r 2 . (2) 
 
 and as the like is true for every point of the cylinder, this is 
 called the equation of the cylinder for the given axes of 
 reference. 
 
 Now that points, as a x a' v may be common to both surfaces, 
 and hence be points of their intersection, the x , y, and z of (1) 
 and (2) must be the same. That is, (1) and (2) will both be 
 true at once for the same point, so that we can substitute any 
 term in one for the like term in the other. 
 
 Then, from (1), y 2 = R 2 — ( x 2 -f- z 2 ~) 
 
 and from (2), (x -f- 3 2 ) = (f 2 -j- % ax — a2 ) 
 whence, y 2 = — 2ax -f- (R 2 — r 2 a ) (3) 
 
 which, since z is eliminated, is the equation of the curve aa b , in 
 the plane XY. Also, the term in the parenthesis is constant, 
 being made up of constants, and as a is a part of it, it may be 
 written 2wa, and (3) then becomes 
 
 y 2 = — 2 ax -f- 2 na = — 2 a(x — ri) (4). 
 
 If now we shift the origin O to the left, on the axis of X, so 
 as to make x — x w, 
 
 (4) will become, £/ 2 = — 2aa; (5). 
 
 Restoring now the neglected sign of x, we finally have 
 
 y 2 =2ax (6) 
 
 the usual form of the equation of a parabola lying, as a b a does, 
 to the right of its vertex taken as the origin. The curve aa b is, 
 therefore the arc of a parabola, of which HO is the axis. 
 
 4°. Joint-lines and surfaces of the sphere. — The coursing 
 joints on that part of the sphere which is independent of 
 the lunette, are horizontal circles, IQ — I^Q'', OR — G"R", 
 
112 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 etc., found by dividing the meridian of radius 0"A" into an odd 
 number of equal parts, — here eleven. The broken joints, 
 RQ — R"Q", etc., are arcs of meridians. 
 
 The beds of the dome voussoirs are the conical surfaces, as 
 P"Q"I"J", having the centre, 00", of the sphere for a com¬ 
 mon vertex, and intersecting the spherical surfaces in the 
 horizontal circles, as I"Q" and J"P". 
 
 5°. Radial joint-surfaces of the lunette. — These are wholly 
 plane, and their edges are the intersections of these planes 
 with the several surfaces of the dome and arch. 
 
 Divide the arc a'doL*, so that a[ shall be lower than E", the 
 corresponding first one from A", of the eleven equal divis¬ 
 ions, on the dome section; here, into five equal parts. The 
 reason for this will soon appear. 
 
 The lunette joints in the spherical intrados. — lb 2 is the trace 
 on V of the plane, R%, of the horizontal circle GR — G"R". 
 This plane cuts the plane of the joint o'd 2 in a horizontal line 
 at b 2 , which, by projection, gives 5 2 , and thence b 2 . Hence, 
 a 2 b 2 — a 2 b 2 — a 2 b 2 is one of these joints, showing that must 
 be lower than E", in order that there should be such a joint. 
 The others are found in the same way. 
 
 6°. The lunette joints in the conical beds of the dome. — One 
 of these is the intersection of the plane o'd 2 , with the conical 
 bed, C"G"R"R'". To find it, draw qd 2 , at the height of C"^, 
 to give qd 2 , the trace of the horizontal plane of C d 2 — C "q l 
 upon V- As before, this plane cuts from the plane o'd 2 a per¬ 
 pendicular to V at d 2 , which, in horizontal projection, gives e? 2 , 
 on the horizontal projection, C d 2 (C being projected from C"), 
 of the circle considered ; and thence d 2 . The joint sought is 
 evidently a hyperbola , it being the intersection of the plane 
 o x o'd' 2 with the cone whose axis is the vertical at O, and whose 
 slant is that of G"0". Hence, make p'O'o' = G"0"A", and 
 Op — O'p' is that element whose intersection with the plane, 
 op'd'i, is the vertex, p r p , of this hyperbola ; whose horizontal 
 projection pb 2 d 2 can now be more accurately drawn than with¬ 
 out the aid of the vertex p. Finally, make 0"p"=the height 
 of p\ and p"b 2 d 2 is the vertical projection of the same hyper¬ 
 bolic joint, of which only b 2 dr — b 2 d 2 — b 2 d 2 is real. 
 
 Any other hyperbolic joints are found in the same way. 
 
 Other lunette lines. — These are, for the same joint plane 
 o'd 2 , the circular arc d 2 e — d 2 e! — d 2 e'\ on the spherical extrados • 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 113 
 
 efo — e' , on the horizontal ledge, generated by — 
 
 e'g 2 on the cylindrical back of the dome ; g 2 u l — g 2 , on the 
 extrados of the arch ; u x u — g 2 a 2 , a radial edge in the arch; 
 and ua 2 — a 2 , on the intrados of the arch. 
 
 The large diameter of the arch, as compared with the radius 
 OA x , carries the point tt't" nearly out of the quadrant, OAAj, 
 unless, as shown at t't", it be taken lower than the correspond¬ 
 ing point bb\. 
 
 II. The directing Instruments. — These, besides Nos. 1 and 
 2, are patterns of all the plane, cylindrical, and conical surfaces 
 of voussoirs, with certain bevels, as follows, taking for illustra¬ 
 tions the stone between o'd 2 and o'g[ of the lunette, and the 
 stone R^Q^S^T", of the dome. 
 
 No. 3 shows the real form, a[g[a 2 g' 2 , of the plane end of the 
 lunette stone, which is in the plane V. 
 
 Nos. 4, 5, and 6, Fig. 70, are patterns of the intrados (No. 
 5) of the same stone, and of the two radial plane joints when 
 folded into the paper. Their construction is obvious, since like 
 points have like letters with Fig. 69, and are found by ordi¬ 
 nates from the vertical plane end, No. 3, in the plane V- 
 
 Useful bevels (not shown), would be No. 7, giving the angle 
 Jc"B"Fi"; and Nos. 8 and 9, giving the positions of the plane 
 beds on ct^d* and a\g[, relative to the intrados a[a 2 . 
 
 No. 10, the pattern of that plane end, MNW, of this stone, 
 which is in the dome, is G"C"D"H"FB"E". 
 
 From MN to a 2 b 2 is a spherical zone. 
 
 From N5 to b x d x is a conical zone, No. 11. 
 
 From 5W in the plane B "k" to d x f Xi is a horizontal plane 
 surface, No. 12. 
 
 From the vertical line, W — extends the vertical cyl¬ 
 
 indrical back, No. 13, of the dome, intersected by those sur¬ 
 faces of the lunette which are parallel to its axis o'o x . 
 
 The three remaining surfaces of the part of the stone in the 
 dome, are the plane annular portion, No. 14, generated by 
 D^H"; the spherical portion generated by D^C", and a conical 
 portion, No. 15, generated by C"G"; all starting from the 
 plane OW, and all limited at their intersections with that 
 portion of the stone which is in the arch. 
 
 Patterns of these surfaces, so far as developable, may readily 
 8 
 
114 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 be made ; also bevels, conveniently giving the position of tlieii 
 horizontal edges, relative to the end in the plane OW. 
 
 Thus this very irregular stone has thirteen faces , plane, 
 cylindrical, conical, and spherical. 
 
 To gain as full an idea of it as drawings alone can give, com¬ 
 plete its projection on V ; and make two or more isometrical, 
 or oblique projections of it. 
 
 For the proposed stone of the dome , the pattern, No. 16, 
 of its vertical plane end will be needed ; and those 
 of its conical beds, as P^Q^V^S", Nos. 17 and 18. 
 
 No. 17, for example, Fig. 71, is the development of 
 R ,, R ,/, U // T", found by describing the arcs from O, with radii 
 equal to 0"G" and 0"C", and by making R^'T" = RT from 
 the plan. 
 
 Finally, bevels like No. 19, will be useful, giving the rela¬ 
 tive positions of elements of the conical beds, and great circles 
 of either the intrados or extrados of the dome. And a tem¬ 
 plet, No. 20, should be cut to an arc of a great circle of thr 
 spherical intrados. 
 
 III. Application. — For a stone as irregular as that of tha 
 lunette, the method by squaring (105) is preferable, if not in¬ 
 dispensable. Then form a right prism, the pattern of whose 
 base shall be the horizontal projection, b i a 2 uxg i WM, of this 
 stone; and upon whose rear and lateral faces the two plane 
 heads can be marked by Nos. 3 and 16. 
 
 Next, the intrados and plane joints of the arch portion of the 
 stone can readily be made square with the back by No. 2, and 
 formed by Nos. 4, 5, and 6. 
 
 The plane, W/^5, is readily made; square with the end 
 on MW, and marked by No. 12 ; the cylindrical back, square 
 with the last surface, and marked by No. 13; and the spher¬ 
 ical surface, MNcqa^, by Nos. 19 and 20. 
 
 Pendentives. 
 
 127. In connection with domes, the related subject of square 
 areas, covered by spherical surfaces, may be noticed; though 
 detailed figures must be omitted for want of room. PI. X., Fig. 
 72, shows a skeleton sketch of such a design, which is some¬ 
 times adopted on account of the stately appearance of a dome¬ 
 like ceiling. Here let ABCD be the half of a square floor, of 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 115 
 
 which the circumscribed circle, of radius OB, is the base of a 
 hemisphere. The four walls of the room will then be bounded 
 by vertical small semicircles, as BC — A'Q'D' ; the ceiling 
 F'H'E', within the circle of radius OA will be a spherical seg¬ 
 ment ; and the four areas like ABI will be covered by spherical 
 gores, shown more clearly at A r 'B"l' r , in the elevation made on 
 a vertical plane, whose ground line is mq, perpendicular to the 
 diagonal BO. 
 
 128. Two j oint-sy stems. —The joints of the spherical surface 
 may then be either (a) horizontal small circles , and vertical 
 meridians', or (6) vertical small circles , and meridians, all 
 having BO —B" for a common diameter; the beds bounded by 
 the small circle joints being conical in both cases. 
 
 Examples.— 1°. Make figure 69, on a scale of or larger, and with the arch 
 
 smaller in proportion. 
 
 2°. The same with the two elevations side by side. 
 
 3°. The same, with the axis of the arch coinciding with a horizontal diameter 
 of the dome. 
 
 4°. Complete the projection of the dome on V* 
 
 5. Construct the dome with pendentives, Fig. 72, in detail on a large scale, and 
 by each joint-system. 
 
 SPIRALS. 
 
 129. A few observations on the spirals found in the next 
 problem are here added, as they may not be conveniently acces¬ 
 sible elsewhere. 
 
 A SPIRAL is a plane curve , generated by a point which has 
 two simultaneous motions, or, more precisely, whose actual 
 motion can be revolved into two components ; one, a rotary mo¬ 
 tion, around a central point called the pole ; the other, a radial 
 motion, outward from the pole. 
 
 130. Illustrations. The spiral of Archimedes.—This is the 
 simplest of all the spirals ; since each of the component motions 
 
 Fig. 11. 
 
116 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 of the generatrix is uniform. Thus in Fig. 11, let O be the 
 pole, and OA, the initial line , so-called, on which the successive 
 equal increments of the radial movement are laid off. Then 
 divide aiiy circle, having O for its centre, into equal parts, as at 
 1, 2, 3, etc., and make 0&j=0 b; Oc 1 z=Oc; 0d x = 0 A, etc., 
 
 and Oa x b x c x .tangent to OA at O, will be a spiral of 
 
 Archimedes. The distance of any point of the curve from the 
 pole is called its radius vector. 
 
 In this example the circle is divided in 16 equal parts; hence, 
 a circle of a radius, which we will call OAi, comprising 16 of the 
 parts of OA, from O, would be divided into the same number 
 of parts as OA^ As OA and any fractional part of the circle 
 of radius OA may be divided into the same number of equal 
 parts there may be an infinite variety of spirals of Archimedes. 
 
 Let the —th part of circle OA be divided into the same 
 n r 
 
 number of parts as the radius OA. Then, calling the radius 
 vector = r ; OA = a , and the arc, as A3, corresponding to any 
 radius vector, as Oc, = 6 , we have, directly from the definition, 
 
 r:a:: 0 : ~.2na : 
 n 
 
 whence 
 
 r 
 
 aO 6 
 
 —Ana 
 
 ( 1 ) 
 
 n n 
 
 which is the general equation of the spiral in the form most 
 convenient for use in drawing tangents to it by the method of 
 resultants. 
 
 131. Tangent to the spiral of Archimedes. Differentiating (1) 
 
 = - 2tt ; where or — ^ is the ratio of the rotary and 
 dr n dr n * 
 
 the radial components of the motion of the generatrix, the 
 
 former being referred to the circumference of the circle whose 
 
 radius is a. The application will be better understood by an 
 
 example. 
 
 As we may generally make m = 1, write at once ^ ^ 
 
 Then let it be required to construct the tangent at b x , in Fig 
 12. Here, n = 4, since 1 of the circle OA is divided into the 
 same number of parts as are found on the line OA. Then lay 
 off on P b x produced, b x n — 1, on any convenient scale; and 
 2 j9 = 2tt, by the same scale, on the tangent at 2 to the circle OA; 
 reduce the rotary component as estimated with the radius P2, 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 117 
 
 to its actual value, ^s, parallel to 2 \p, at b x , by drawing the 
 radius P p. Then, 5,f, the diagonal of the parallelogram on the 
 components, b x n and b x s, is the required tangent at 6*. 
 
 If n = 1, Pc?, and the circle of radius Pc? will be divided into 
 the same number of equal parts, ^ and 2 p would be 
 
 4 times 2p, or b x n would have been called 1 instead of 4. 
 
 132. The subnormal method. — Draw PQ perpendicular to 
 P6i, and limited at Q by the normal JjQ. Then PQ is the sub¬ 
 normal. Now the triangles PQ5i and b x nt are similar, and give, 
 PQ: b x n :: P b x : b x s (= nt ) 
 
 whence PQ = JjW X 
 
 b x s 
 
 But if b x n is made constant for each point, 2 p will be so also; 
 and hence, as we see from the figure, b x s will vary as P?^; that 
 Pb 
 
 is, the ratio — will be constant. Thus PQ is constant. Hence, 
 
 O^S 
 
 having any one tangent, any other can be found as follows. 
 Take, for example, the point e x . Draw a perpendicular, PQi, 
 not shown, to its radius vector P^; at P, and equal to PQ. 
 Then Q^ will be the normal at e x , where the tangent will then 
 be perpendicular to Q^. 
 
 133. The tangentoid spiral. — This is one of a series of 
 curves known as the trigonometrical spirals, in each of which 
 the radius vector, r, is some trigonometrical function of the 
 angle, #, between it and the fixed initial line. 
 
118 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 The tangentoid spiral is that in which the increments of the 
 radius vectors are equal, or proportional, to the increments of 
 the vectorial angle, 0. 
 
 Thus, let P, Fig. 18, be the pole, and Pa = a, the initial line. 
 Divide the circle Pa at pleasure as at 1, 2, etc., then on Fb, for 
 example, make r=PB = a6 = PaX the tangent of BPa, 
 and B will be a point of a tangentoid spiral, whose equation, 
 simply expressing the construction, is, r= a. tan 0 ; or, if a = 1, 
 then r = tan 6 ; that is, r is equal to the tangent of 6. But if, 
 having drawn either a x b x . or a 2 b 2 parallel to ab, we should make 
 PBj (not shown), z=a x b x ; or, PB 2 = aj> 2 , we should find new 
 forms of the spiral; where if Pa! = a x and Pa 2 = a 2 , their 
 equations would be r — a x . tan 6 ; and r = a 2 . tan 0, and r 
 would be proportional to tan 6. 
 
 134. Initial line a secant. — In Fig. 13, the initial line, Pa, 
 is evidently tangent to the spiral at the pole, P. This is not 
 always so. 
 
 Fig. 14. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 119 
 
 Thus, Fig. 14, let Ea and EP include any angle whatever, 
 and let them he divided proportionally by parallels as A a, B5 
 etc., including PL. Then arcs from A, B, etc., will meet the 
 corresponding radials, Pa, P6, etc., in points etc., of a 
 
 curve which will still be a tangentoid spiral. For the incre¬ 
 ments, CD, CB, etc., of the radius vector, r, estimated from the 
 circle Cwhere P^c is perpendicular to Ea, are proportional 
 to the increments, cd , cb, etc., of the tangents of 6 , where 9 is 
 estimated from Pc. 
 
 Evidently P is the pole, and PL the tangent at P. 
 
 Then, in order to write r = tan 6 ; make ML =: Pcj; and 
 take 6 — MPL. Then ML —: tan 9 ; and MP = r = 1. 
 
 Also the tangent increment Mm = the radial increment 
 cji = CA, where Pm is the radius vector drawn through the 
 
 point a x . Likewise, M n = CE, etc. 
 
 • dv 
 
 185. The tangent line. — From r — tan 9 , gg— sec 2 0 = 
 sec 2 9 
 
 Now at a 15 for example, Pm = sec 9 , and PM = 1. Then 
 a third proportional ( x ) to PM, and Pm, will be the fonger 
 side of a rectangle ; equal to (Pm) 2 , and whose other side equals 
 PM. That is PMx#= (Pm) 2 . Buttliefigures PMXa? and PM 2 
 (= l 2 ) having the common altitude PM, are to each other as 
 
 J r>T\r rpi i • dr sec 2 9 (Pm 2 ) PMXa; x 
 
 x and PM. lhat is, -r n = -r-j- = - — _. 
 
 dd 
 
 l 2 (PM 2 ) PM a 
 
 Hence, make a x H = the 3 d proportional, x , for the radial 
 component of the motion of the generatrix ; and M& = MP = 1 
 for the rotatory component, referred to the line on which tan 9 is 
 estimated, and which will be reduced by the line P& to its 
 value, A&J, for the circle of radius P a x . Then, making HK = 
 M x , K a x is the required tangent at a v 
 
 We now close with the following, which, besides its interest 
 as a structure, embraces, as appropriate for a final problem, 
 representatives of all the four classes of surfaces which form 
 the main divisions of descriptive geometry, and of its applica¬ 
 tion in this volume. 
 
120 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 Problem XX. 
 
 The annular and radiant groined arch. 
 
 136. Supposed conditions. — Suppose that a building for 
 private library or cabinet, or, if of suitable dimensions, for 
 locomotive engine house, is to consist of a gallery, annular in 
 plan, and inclosing a central circular area. Also let the 
 gallery be divided into seven compartments by arches, whose 
 straight elements shall radiate from a vertical line at the centre 
 of the central area. 
 
 I. The Projections. 1°. — Let a vertical line at O, Plate X., 
 Fig. 73, be the axis of four concentric vertical cylinders gener¬ 
 ated by the revolution about this axis of vertical lines at A, 
 a, 5, and B, where OA is 27 ft. 6 in. ; OB, 12 ft. 6 in. ; AB 
 15 feet; and ab 9 feet, making the thickness of the walls A a 
 and B6, 3 feet. 
 
 Let the circular gallery between the walls be covered by an 
 arch, whose intrados is the half annular torus generated by the 
 revolution of the vertical semicircle aob , of 4 ft. 6 in. radius, 
 shown at acjb on the plane V- Let this gallery be divided into 
 seven equal compartments, one of which is bounded by the arc 
 AD, of 24.68 ft., and the radials, OA and OD. 
 
 This arc, AD, may be accurately determined by laying off 
 
 any suitable fractional part, as — of it, n times. Or, from a 
 
 71 / 
 
 table of sides of inscribed regular polygons, we can find the 
 length (here 23.86 ft.) of the chord equal to one side of the 
 regular polygon (here a heptagon), indicated by the number 
 of compartments. 
 
 Setting off each way from A, D, etc., 3 ft. on the outer cir¬ 
 cumference, as at AE and AF, and drawing the radii, as OE 
 and OF, we have the piers, as shown at Ee/F, and L'AH ; and 
 the area GFIJ which is to be covered by the radiant arch. This 
 arch is here represented as closed at its ends by twelve inch 
 walls ; which, with the piers, form alcoves. 
 
 2°. The intrados of the radiant arch will, in any case, natur¬ 
 ally be a right conoid (114), extending from OF to OG, and 
 whose springing plane will be the same as that of the annular 
 arch; viz., the horizontal plane containing the diameter ab. 
 The conoid will then be generated by the straight line OF, 
 
STONE—CUTTING. 
 
 121 
 
 moving so as to be parallel to the springing plane as a plane 
 director, while moving upon the vertical line at O, and some 
 curve of a height equal to oc 2 , and included symmetrically be¬ 
 tween OF and OG. 
 
 3°. Two systems. — At this point, there is a choice between 
 the two methods, one or the other of which would be most 
 naturally chosen. 
 
 First. The curved directrix may be the ellipse whose trans¬ 
 verse axis is the chord of any arc, as oo x , or GF, included be¬ 
 tween OG and OF, and whose semi-conjugate axis is a verti¬ 
 cal, equal to oc 2 at the middle point of such chord. 
 
 Second. The curved directrix, may, instead, be the curve of 
 double curvature, formed by wrapping upon some of the vertical 
 cylinders, as DGA, a semi-ellipse whose transverse axis is 
 the true length of the corresponding arc , as GF, and whose 
 semi-conjugate axis equals oc 2 . as before. 
 
 4°. Adopting the second system. — KG^ is the curved 
 directrix of the conoidal intrados; where KG), tangent to 
 GKF at K, equals the arc IvG, and KK X perpendicular to KG) 
 equals oc 2 . The method of concentric circles on the given 
 axes , is adopted, as shown, for constructing this eclipse, on ac¬ 
 count of its convenience in affording, at the same time, an easy 
 construction of any desired tangents, as also shown. 
 
 5°. The groin curves. — These are found by auxiliary hori¬ 
 zontal planes, taken for convenience though the inner extremi¬ 
 ties a l5 etc., of the radial joints of the annular arch, where ac 2 b 
 is divided here into five equal parts. Each plane will then 
 cut two horizontal circles, centred at O, from the torus, and 
 two elements from the conoid, whose intersections with the 
 circles will be four points of the groin curves. Thus g , /, i, j, 
 are the points determined by the springing plane ; c x the apex 
 of the groin, is the intersection of the circle Oc with the 
 element KO. Then, for example, making b'{, at the height, 
 b x x 2 , = b x q ; and Ka^, = Ka; 2 = KM, the two circles with 
 radii, Op and Oq, will intersect the corresponding elements 
 Oaq and OM, at the four points, l , ? x , m, and m x of the groin 
 curves. 
 
 6°. Nature of the horizontal projections of the groin curves .— 
 Each of those just found is an arc of a spiral of Archimedes 
 (130), for, from the properties of ellipses having an axis in 
 each equal (oc 2 = KK X ) we have, 
 
122 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 oa 3 : op :: IvX 2 : Ivz 2 ; 
 
 or, by the substitution of equal terms, 
 
 n 2 n : m 2 m :: KN : KM. 
 
 That is, the increments, n 2 n and m 2 m, of the radius vectors, 
 are proportional to the corresponding increments, KN and KM 
 of the arc which marks their angular movement. 
 
 The pole and the initial line. — O, the given intersection of 
 the radius vectors, is th & pole; and, knowing the character of 
 the curve, find a fourth proportional to jg (= ah') GF (= 2G t K) 
 andj’O (= 50) and lay it off from G to the left , or from F to 
 the right, on the circle OK, and points will be found, where 
 the radii to O will be the initial lines of the spirals, fc x j and 
 gcj, respectively ; and hence, tangent to them at O. 
 
 The portions of these spirals beyond ^7 and/, and within i 
 and j, as at /CO, being projections of no actual lines of the 
 structure, are called parasites. 
 
 7°. The tangentoid system. — Turning to this (3°) for a mo¬ 
 ment, for comparison, suppose that the vertical ellipse, of trans¬ 
 verse axis, gf, and vertical semi-conjugate axis at o 2 , = oc 2 , had 
 been chosen as the curved directrix of the conoid. Then, as o x 
 and o 2 are at equal heights, lines parallel to o x o 2 , as y x y 2 , would 
 give elements ; circular, with radius O y x , through y x on the 
 torus, and straight at y£) on the conoid, which would meet as 
 at y, a point of the curve of intersection of the torus and the 
 new conoid; a curve whose horizontal projection, gyc x , etc., 
 would be an arc of a tangentoid spiral (133). For evidently 
 the increments, as o x y x , y x g, etc., of the radius vectors, are pro¬ 
 portional to the increments, as o 2 y 2 , yyg, etc., of the tangents of 
 the angles made by these radius vectors with Oo 2 as an initial 
 line (134). 
 
 8 °. Section and joints of the annular arch. — Let the figure 
 AViV^B be the section of the annular arch. By revolution 
 about the vertical axis at O, this figure, being in the vertical 
 plane on OA, will generate the volume of masonry, covering 
 the annular arch ; and its radial lines, as a x v x , will generate the 
 coursing surfaces, or beds, of the voussoirs. These beds will 
 obviously be conical surfaces, as at N'wajV, all having the ver¬ 
 tical line at O for their common axis. The heads, or transverse 
 joints, as at YZ, are in vertical planes through O. 
 
 9°. The joints of the conoidal arch. — The bed surfaces 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 123 
 
 should, strictly, be normal to the conoidal intrados, along the 
 elements, as MM b which are the coursing joints. They will 
 therefore be hyperbolic-paraboloids (117). 
 
 But at the highest element, the conoidal surface is develop¬ 
 able along one element, KO, since a horizontal tangent plane 
 will evidently there be tangent all along that element. Hence, 
 the normal surface on KO will also be a plane, and the normal 
 surfaces on elements near KO will therefore be very nearly 
 plane. Hence, the bed surface on NN x may properly be plane. 
 
 10°. Construction of the warped bed on MMj. — Assume at 
 V 2 a vertical plane of projection, L/T', perpendicular to MM,; 
 on which MM X is therefore projected in the point m', at the 
 height L 'm' = pa x = b'ix 2 on Vi> Drawing the tangent b x li n , as 
 shown, make MT, tangent at M, equal to x{£", and by project¬ 
 ing T at T', m' T' will be its vertical projection. Then (116) 
 TO will be an element of one generation, and the horizontal 
 trace of the tangent hyperbolic paraboloid, generated by the 
 motion, parallel to H, of MO,upon MT — m'T' and O — L/M'. 
 Hence, mt , m x u, M^, and Ss, are elements of the other gener¬ 
 ation of the same tangent surface ; and m't', m’u', etc., are their 
 vertical projections. 
 
 Taking, now, a horizontal plane, M'sj, at a height, L/M', 
 equal to v x q x ; perpendiculars m' R( m'r', etc., to m' T', m't', etc., 
 and limited by M'sj, will be those elements of the normal hy¬ 
 perbolic paraboloid, which are the lines MT — m'T', etc., re¬ 
 volved 90° about MM! — m' as an axis (117). Hence, project 
 B/ on MT at R; r' on mt at r, etc., and MwMjR^R will be 
 the horizontal projection of the required normal bed on MM L . 
 
 The actual limits of this bed are at its intersections mp 2 Q, 
 and wqQx, with the corresponding conical beds, Q q x pm, and 
 Q x m x q, of the annular arch. These are found as follows : As¬ 
 sume any intermediate point P on the joint a x v x , makers" at the 
 height from L/T', equal to P p x , and project r" at r'" on MT; 
 z' at z , on mt; s" at s'", etc., and r'"zs'" will be the intersection 
 of the normal joint on MMj, with the plane r"s"; limited at p 2 
 by p\p 2 , the corresponding horizontal section of the torus. 
 Therefore, MRQp 2 m is a definite normal joint. MiWqQiRi ia 
 another. 
 
 11°. The outer edge, RR^ of the warped bed on MM X is a hy¬ 
 perbola. —This we know from the properties of the normal sur¬ 
 face, since any plane which cuts the intersection of the twc 
 
124 
 
 STEBEOTOMY. 
 
 plane directors cuts the surface in a hyperbola; and as the tan¬ 
 gent hyperbolic paraboloid on MM ls revolves 90° on MMj to 
 become the normal one, its former plane director, of the gener¬ 
 ation MMj, which is Hi becomes a vertical plane, parallel to 
 MM X . The other plane director is perpendicular to MM X . The 
 intersection of the two is thence a vertical line, which accord¬ 
 ingly cuts the horizontal plane M'sj, containing the curve RR l5 
 which is therefore a hyperbola. 
 
 Otherwise ; by direct demonstration. The triangles T'L'm' 
 and m'M'R/, and other like pairs, are similar, and give 
 L'T' : Wm' :: L'm' : M'R' 
 
 Also, Ju't r : M 'm' :: Um': MV 
 
 whence L'T' X M'R'^:^'^ x MV. 
 
 That is, MT X MR = mt X ntr. 
 
 Substituting for MT and mt , the proportionals to them, MO 
 and mO, we have 
 
 MO X MR = mO X mr ; 
 which may be written, xy = xJy ’; 
 
 if the curve be referred to OM, and a perpendicular, 00 2 , to it 
 at O, as axes. 
 
 At the point equidistant from the axes, 
 
 x’ — y', and putting x'y' — J&, we have xy = Jc' 2 ; which is the 
 equation of the hyperbola , referred to its asymptotes. 
 
 At the point for example, x= OS, y = S» x . 
 
 The mean proportional to these is SI — Jc ; whence 2, the 
 vertex, is found, as shown, on the transverse axis, 02, of the 
 curve, which bisects the angle, S00 1? between the asymptotes. 
 
 This being here a right angle, the hyperbola is of the form 
 called equilateral. 
 
 12°. Construction of an approximate plane-normal joint, on 
 NNj. — The point N is symmetrical with X 1? hence the tangent 
 at X x is symmetrical with that at N. Then draw the tangent 
 Ujk. Make Vi tangent to the cylinder DKA at X 1? then X^ 
 (= X 2 K) will be the horizontal projection of this tangent. 
 But b'ik being straight, and oblique to the elements, as K& of 
 the cylinder, will, when wrapped upon the cylinder DKA, be 
 transformed into a helix, whose projection, and that of its tan¬ 
 gent, on Vi, will in the vicinity of Jc, be sensibly WJc produced. 
 Hence, make arc X&" = X : x, project x" on b'{Jc produced, and 
 x"Jc±, will be the true height at which the tangents at X x (bj) 
 and at N, will pierce the plane OK. 
 
STONE-CUTTING. 
 
 125 
 
 This found, take x r v r for the ground line of a new vertical 
 plane V 3 ; project N upon it at the height a 3 n' (= a 3 a 2 ), and x 
 at k x at the height x"h x ; when n’ k x will be the element at N?i f of 
 the tangent hyperbolic paraboloid on NN 4 ; and n'Y' perpendic¬ 
 ular to it, an element of the normal hyperbolic paraboloid on 
 NN X , where v'Y' =vY. Hence, projecting Y' at N 2 (on the 
 tangent at N) N 2 N", parallel to NN X , will be the trace, on the 
 horizontal plane Y'Y" of the top of the annular arch, of the 
 tangent plane at Nw/ to the normal hyperbolic paraboloid ; 
 that is, of the approximate plane joint. 
 
 In fact, two such planes should have been similarly made; 
 one tangent at the middle point of Nw, for the bed NN 2 N'w ; 
 and one at the middle point of Npq, for the bed N^N". 
 
 II. The Directing Instruments. — After the previous thorough 
 working up of all the lines and surfaces composing the required 
 structure, these can now be summarily described. 
 
 Besides Nos. 1 and 2 (7), there should be, for the stone 
 W"Wna 3 qi , for example, — 
 
 No. 3. The pattern W'Wvq x , of the horizontal plane top. 
 
 No. 4. The pattern of the cylindrical back, which, to the 
 the right of Q£, is temporary. In No. 4, qfi = q 2 N " 7 ; 5 4 6 == 
 w 1 V / , both in length and direction ; b 4 4 = X 3 6 2 ; 4 5, and 5b 3 
 are respectively equal to the like spaces on the plan ; and 
 q 3 q 4 = Y x v x . No. 5 is a pattern of the end,YV x v x a ^ in the arch. 
 
 No. 6 is the development of the conical bed, Q q x pm. The 
 vertex of this cone is found after revolution, at O', the inter¬ 
 section of 00' perpendicular to OA, with v x a x produced. Hence 
 with O' as a centre draw a x m 3 =pm, and v 1 Q 1 = ^ 1 Q; likewise 
 W x =pip 2 , and Q x v x a x m 3 will be the required pattern. 
 
 No. 7 is the pattern found in the same way as was No. 6 , of 
 the conical bed N'wa 3 w. 
 
 No. 8 , which could exist only for a plane bed, is the pattern 
 N 5 N 4 4 w, of the plane joint N'^'N'^ ; hence N 4 4 = Y'n’. 
 
 Nos. 9 and 10, bevels giving respectively the angles VjVcq, 
 and Y a 2 a x , will be useful in determining the relative position of 
 the top, and the conical bed Wva 3 n ; and of this bed and the 
 annular intrados ; both 9 and 10, being held in meridian planes 
 of the torus. 
 
 No. 11, set to the angle n'Y 1 n", will, in like manner, serve 
 to fix the proper position of N'N" r 4w, relative to the plane top. 
 
126 
 
 STEREOTOMY. 
 
 III. Application. — Choosing a sufficient block, bring it pro¬ 
 visionally to the form of a prism, whose base is 7ia 3 g 2 4, except 
 that the vertical cylindrical face on na need not be wrought. 
 
 Then, mark the intended top by No. 3, and the back by No. 
 
 4. The lines thus given, with the form of the end given by No. 
 
 5, will guide the cutting out of the portion Q,tqiq 2 . 
 
 The lower conical bed can then be directed from the end, 
 and from the vertical surface on Vm, and shaped by No. 6. 
 The upper conical bed will then be determined by No. 9 and 
 No. T. 
 
 The remaining work is obvious enough, the construction of 
 No. 4 showing the ordinates from the base of the provisional 
 prism in the plane 45 3 to the edges w4 and na 3 . 
 
 137. St. Griles 1 Screw. — This term is applied to circular 
 stairs with solid central core, or column, where the surface seen 
 overhead in ascending the stairs is a double-curved helicoidal 
 surface, such as would be generated by the section, AaV'B6, of 
 an annular arch, PI. X., Fig. 73, were it to move so that every 
 point of it should describe a helix about the vertical axis at O ; 
 the course of stones generated by being solid with the 
 
 core. The coursing surfaces of such an arch would be oblique 
 helicoids, generated by a y v^ etc. ; and the method of cutting 
 of the stone may be sufficiently understood from the cutting of 
 the voussoirs of the oblique arch. 
 
 Examples. — 1°. Make the full construction of Fig. 73 on the tangentoid system. 
 
 2°. Make drawings of a key-stone, extending both ways from ci in each arch. 
 
 3°. Also of an inner pier groin stone, as MimiQi. 
 
 4°. Construct the plane joints indicated in 12°. 
 
 5°. Make the necessary illustrative drawings of the douhle-curved arched cover¬ 
 ing of circular stairs, known as the St. Giles’ screw (137). The coursing joints are 
 oblique helicoids, generated by radii of the semicircle ac^b, Fig. 73. The heading 
 joints are in planes perpendicular to the helix generated by the highest point, C 2 , 
 of the same semicircle. The coursing joints thus generated are not quite normal 
 to the double-curved arch surface, but are nearly enough so. To be perfectly so, 
 they should be generated by normals to that intrados, that is, by lines, not only 
 perpendicular to the tangents to the semicircle, as at its points of division, etc., 
 but also to the tangents to the helices at the same points. The construction would 
 be too laborious, and thence more apt to be inexact. 
 
 THE END. 
 

 • I 
 
 V 
 
 A. 
 
 fr 
 
 c\ 
 
 31017 
 
 
 Pi.l 
 
 3 Io.S, 
 
 
 M- 
 
 3¥. ,m 
 
 
 o.’’ 
 
 - 
 
 »» 
 
 •jici... 
 
 -+-i—F-tt-T-^ 
 
 ; ic- LVi i 
 
 . -RTF7 
 
 •1 
 
 \ 3Tol. 
 
 Vp» 
 
 
 “* t%r* -Til —; ry 
 
 // u 
 
 / s? / i to 
 
 1 7 #n \ 
 
 B j N 1 1 
 
 Mp* 
 
 8 ’lTaa 
 
 | /f°? jr 
 
 J -Mr j 4 ' 
 
 i k_U 
 
 3 
 
 7*U' 
 
 Y, 
 
 £* 
 
 i* 
 
 
 
 : \ 1 \ 
 
 \ \ 
 
 
 TH 
 
 » 
 
 \ \ 
 
 \ \ 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 \ \ 
 
 
 $ 
 
 
 \ \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 % 
 
 * 
 
 * 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 \\ 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 < S' 
 
 
 0 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 . «i 
 
 
 1 
 
 -J 
 
 
 - 1 
 
 ivL. 
 
 V--*''"' * 
 
 
 
 J j 
 
 \JJL. 
 
 H 
 
 ! / y 
 
 "tl'VW 
 
 WALL & BUTTRESS “1 
 
 plate: -band 
 SCv-3: l" 
 
 \ 
 
 I 
 
pim 
 
#■" / 
 
 
 
 
 
 
«' Am 
 
 k h' 
 
 M 
 
 A A A* /i 
 
 
pi.'vn 
 
% 
 
 
 
* 
 
 
 
 
PITS. 
 
 W 
 
 or 
 
 o" 
 
 w 
 
 
 ;J. o" • 
 
 : ; 
 
 • 
 
 ;r 
 
 ; mi 
 
 . .. 
 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 ! 4' 
 
 
 
 H’ 
 
 ft 
 
 ei 
 
 ’JJtxlO 
 
 K 
 
 1’ 
 
 L 
 
 UL 
 
 IB' 
 
 iE’ 
 
 
 3) 
 
 <OL_Jiv 
 
 Soil i 
 
 eL 
 
 —-j— 
 
 0 Ai 
 
 Mil 
 
 Xf 
 
 i! 
 
 - ! -'— 
 
 ; i 
 
 jj i { 
 
 
 A \ i ?"0 
 / I ! \l! 
 
 L i 
 
 / /% j 
 
 / / j-i | , 
 f / '-hoK. 
 
 ! * 
 
 / / 
 
 / /, 
 
 / |_ ; X 
 
 - f 1 . \ • 
 
 •v l !_i ; V' 
 
 jrj 
 
 \\ l \ i ' ',} 1 
 
 : \ \ ! 
 
 1 \ '\ 
 \ \ 
 
 \ !\ 
 \' \ |\ 
 
 i ; ! / 
 
 ; •! j • j/; j 
 
 i ! i i 
 
 \ i | 
 
 If 1 1 ft 
 
 i 
 
 Mi !i i 
 
 ! f.i 
 
 i So,\d’ 
 
 -fc 
 
 63 
 
 66 / 
 
 H 
 
 TV T 
 
 07, 
 
 
 3f .1“ -fI 
 
 E 
 
 
 K~ 
 
 z 
 
 J 
 
 \ \ 
 
 IF j 
 
 / 
 
 Scf ^60 
 
 r\ 
 
 / 
 
 Cl_/o / 
 
 J 
 
 T 
 
 R T 
 
 
 
 , 0 " 
 
 • | isy 
 
 tflt 
 
 
 \ K 
 
 O : 
 
 X 
 
 ^nr-; 
 
 / 
 
 -M—I s 
 
 M* 
 
 
 /v C f 
 
 ■|V. s 
 
 i N. 
 
 yCd ; y ... . 
 
 1 
 
 \ 
 
 V \ \\ 
 ->1 
 
 i _' 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 \ 1 
 
 
 
 V ' S ' 
 
 Vi" 
 
 \\ 
 
 
 
 
 D" 
 
 |° 9 
 
 fe'9* 
 
 CA 
 
• .J6SS& .